Operator's manual, truck 5-ton, 6X6, M939 series

Über dieses Buch

Dies ist ein digitales Exemplar eines Buches, das seit Generationen in den Regalen der Bibliotheken aufbewahrt wurde, bevor es von Google imRahmen eines Projekts, mit dem die Bücher dieser Welt online verfügbar gemacht werden sollen, sorgfältig gescannt wurde.

Das Buch hat das Urheberrecht überdauert und kann nun öffentlich zugänglich gemacht werden. Ein öffentlich zugängliches Buch ist ein Buch,das niemals Urheberrechten unterlag oder bei dem die Schutzfrist des Urheberrechts abgelaufen ist. Ob ein Buch öffentlich zugänglich ist, kannvon Land zu Land unterschiedlich sein. Öffentlich zugängliche Bücher sind unser Tor zur Vergangenheit und stellen ein geschichtliches, kulturellesund wissenschaftliches Vermögen dar, das häufig nur schwierig zu entdecken ist.

Gebrauchsspuren, Anmerkungen und andere Randbemerkungen, die im Originalband enthalten sind, finden sich auch in dieser Datei – eine Erin-nerung an die lange Reise, die das Buch vom Verleger zu einer Bibliothek und weiter zu Ihnen hinter sich gebracht hat.

Nutzungsrichtlinien

Google ist stolz, mit Bibliotheken in partnerschaftlicher Zusammenarbeit öffentlich zugängliches Material zu digitalisieren und einer breiten Massezugänglich zu machen. Öffentlich zugängliche Bücher gehören der Öffentlichkeit, und wir sind nur ihre Hüter. Nichtsdestotrotz ist dieseArbeit kostspielig. Um diese Ressource weiterhin zur Verfügung stellen zu können, haben wir Schritte unternommen, um den Missbrauch durchkommerzielle Parteien zu verhindern. Dazu gehören technische Einschränkungen für automatisierte Abfragen.

Wir bitten Sie um Einhaltung folgender Richtlinien:

+ Nutzung der Dateien zu nichtkommerziellen ZweckenWir haben Google Buchsuche für Endanwender konzipiert und möchten, dass Sie dieseDateien nur für persönliche, nichtkommerzielle Zwecke verwenden.

+ Keine automatisierten AbfragenSenden Sie keine automatisierten Abfragen irgendwelcher Art an das Google-System. Wenn Sie Recherchenüber maschinelle Übersetzung, optische Zeichenerkennung oder andere Bereiche durchführen, in denen der Zugang zu Text in großen Mengennützlich ist, wenden Sie sich bitte an uns. Wir fördern die Nutzung des öffentlich zugänglichen Materials für diese Zwecke und können Ihnenunter Umständen helfen.

+ Beibehaltung von Google-MarkenelementenDas "Wasserzeichen" von Google, das Sie in jeder Datei finden, ist wichtig zur Information überdieses Projekt und hilft den Anwendern weiteres Material über Google Buchsuche zu finden. Bitte entfernen Sie das Wasserzeichen nicht.

+ Bewegen Sie sich innerhalb der LegalitätUnabhängig von Ihrem Verwendungszweck müssen Sie sich Ihrer Verantwortung bewusst sein,sicherzustellen, dass Ihre Nutzung legal ist. Gehen Sie nicht davon aus, dass ein Buch, das nach unserem Dafürhalten für Nutzer in den USAöffentlich zugänglich ist, auch für Nutzer in anderen Ländern öffentlich zugänglich ist. Ob ein Buch noch dem Urheberrecht unterliegt, istvon Land zu Land verschieden. Wir können keine Beratung leisten, ob eine bestimmte Nutzung eines bestimmten Buches gesetzlich zulässigist. Gehen Sie nicht davon aus, dass das Erscheinen eines Buchs in Google Buchsuche bedeutet, dass es in jeder Form und überall auf derWelt verwendet werden kann. Eine Urheberrechtsverletzung kann schwerwiegende Folgen haben.

Über Google Buchsuche

Das Ziel von Google besteht darin, die weltweiten Informationen zu organisieren und allgemein nutzbar und zugänglich zu machen. GoogleBuchsuche hilft Lesern dabei, die Bücher dieser Welt zu entdecken, und unterstützt Autoren und Verleger dabei, neue Zielgruppen zu erreichen.Den gesamten Buchtext können Sie im Internet unterhttp://books.google.com durchsuchen.

1

https://books.google.de/books?id=DCRBpIuJrXMC&hl=de

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the information in books and make it universally accessible.

http://books.google.com

https://books.google.de/books?id=DCRBpIuJrXMC&hl=de

BOOKSTACKS-

DOCUMENTS

TM 9-2320-272-10

TO 36A12-1C-441

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

TRUCK, 5-TON, 6X6,

M939 SERIES

(DIESEL)

UNIVERSITY OF

ILLINOIS LIBRARY

AT URBANACHAMPAIGN

STACKS

TRUCK CHASSIS: 5 TON. 6X6, M939,

M940, M941, M942, M943. M944, M945;

TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6. DROPSIDE, M923, M925;

TRUCK. CARGO: 5 TON, 6X6, M924, M926;

TRUCK. CARGO 5 TON, 6X6. XLWB, M927, M928,

TRUCK, DUMP: 5 TON, 6X6, M929, M930,

TRUCK TRACTOR: 5 TON, 6X6, M931. M932;

VAN FXPANSIBLE: 5-TON. 6X6, M934, M935;

TRUCK. MFDIUM WRECKER: 5 TON, 6X6. M936

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE

SEPTEMBER 1982

DEPOSITORY

: JRBANA

3 0112101573589aMPAIGN

M ; m DNCAT

fmitrin> On- 1 ot

HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

WASHINGTON, DC, 24 AUGUST 1987

TM 9-2320-272-10

INTERIM CHANGE

NO. 101Expires 24 August 1989 -OSITORY

SEP 1 1 1987

UNIVERSITY OP ILLINOIS

AT URRAr iAMPAIQN

llOiOtD Mkl

INTERIM CHANGE

TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR TRUCK, 5-TON, 6x6,

M939 AND M939A1 SERIES (DIESEL)

Justification : As a result of a recent Safety-of-Use Message

involving missing or loose wheel rim stud or nut. This is an

immediate action change which shall be incorporated immediately.

Expiration: This interim change expires two years from date of

publication and will be destroyed at that time unless sooner

rescinded or superseded by a permanent change.

1. TM 9-2320-272-10 w/C1, 23 Oct 85 is changed as follows:

Page 2-4^: Add the following after item 2c:

CAUTION

If the vehicle is operated with one or more missing or loose

wheel rim stud or nut, possible wheel rim failure may occur.

Change item 2d to 2e and add new weekly item 2d:

Check for loose, missing, or broken wheel rim studs or

nuts. Notify organizational maintenance to repair and

tighten to proper torque.

2. Post this change per DA Pam 3 1 0-1 3 .

3. File this interim change in front of the publication.

(AMSTA-MBT)

r

1

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air. Force:

CARLE. VUONO

r . v General, United States Army

~fr . , \S6T r i Chief of Staff

Official:

R.L. DILWORTH

Brigadier General United States Army

The Adjutant General

NORMAN© G. LEZY, Colonel, USAF

Official: Director of Administration

LARRY D. WELCH, General, USAF

Chief of Staff

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Truck, Diesel, 5-ton, 6x6, M939 and M939Al-series.

2PIN: 051550-901

H> • IWCAT

326- to/Tnf&rim ck I Ox

HEADQUARTERS


WASHINGTON, DC, 26 OCTOBER 1987

TM 9-2320-272-10

INTERIM CHANGE

NO. 102

Expires 26 October 1989

INTERIM CHANGE

DEPOSITORY

NOV 2 3 1987

UNlVtKai I i Ji ILLINOIS

AT URBANA-CH4MPAIGN

TM 9-2320-272-10

TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR TRUCK,

5-TON, 6x6, M939 AND M939A1 SERIES (DIESEL)

Justification: As a result of a recent Safety-of-Use Message

involving adjustment of the spring brake valve lever arm.

Expiration : This interim change expires two years from date of

publication and will be destroyed at that time unless sooner

rescinded or superseded by a permanent change.

1. TM 9-2320-272-10 w/Cl, 23 Oct 85 is changed as follows:

Page 2-45. Delete item 22c.

Page 2-56. Change page 2-56 to 2-56.1/2-56.2 (blank).

NEW Page 2-56. Add the following BEFORE inspections:

c. Adjust parking brake as required by turning knob on top of

brake lever clockwise to increase braking action,

counterclockwise to override braking action. Vehicle is

Non-Mission Capable (NMC) if it moves with parking brake applied

after adjustment. Notify supervisor.

d. Determine parking brake ability to hold vehicle. Depress

override button on dash, apply parking brake and engage

transmission in 1-5 drive. Vehicle should not move at idle.

WARNING

While performing the following check all personnel

must be cleared of front of vehicle. Failure to

do this will result in injury or death.

l

►

e. Determine spring brake ability to hold vehicle. Apply

service brake, raise parking brake valve lever, place

transmission in 1-5 drive, gradually increase RPM to 1000,

release service brake. Vehicle should not move.

2. Post this change per DA Pam 310-13.

3. File this interim change in front of the publication.

(AMSTA-MBT)

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, and the Air Force:

CARL E. VUONO

General, United States Army

Chief of Staff

Official :

R. L. DILWORTH

Brigadier General, United States Army


NORMAND G. LEZY, Colonel, USAF

Director of Administration

Official :

LARRY D. WELCH, General, USAF

Chief of Staff

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Operator Maintenance requirements for Truck,

Diesel, 5-ton, 6X6, M939 and M939A1 -series.

2

<r VS. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1987 - 201-A22 - U 1/60 129 PIN: 051550-902

CHANGE

B00KSTACKS

DOCUMENTS

NO. 1

TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12-1C-441

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY

AND THE AIR FORCE

WASHINGTON, DC, 14 March 1983

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

FOR

5-TON M939 SERIES TRUCKS (DIESEL)

TRUCK, CHASSIS: 5-TON, 6X6, M939

M940, M941, M942, M943, M944, M945;

TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, DROPSIDE, M923, M925;

TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, M924, M926;

TRUCK, CARGO: 5-TON, 6X6, XLWB, M927, M928;

TRUCK, DUMP: 5-TON, 6X6, M929, M930;

TRUCK, TRACTOR: 5-TON, 6X6, M931, M932;

VAN EXPANSIBLE: 5-TON, 6X6, M934, M935;

TRUCK, MEDIUM WRECKER: 5-TON, 6X6, M936

DEPOSITORY

APR 1 4 1983

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12- 1C-441, 30 September 1982, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed

material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or

revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the illustration.

Remove pages Insert pages

i and ii

v and vi

vii and viii

1-1 and 1-2

1-5 through 1-18

1-23 through 1-26

2- 3 through 2-10

2-13 and 2-14

2-17 and 2-18

2-29 through 2-34

2-39 through 2-76

2-79 through 2-88

2-93 through 2-96

2-99 through 2-102

2-105 through 2-124

18

i and ii

v and vi

vii and viii

1-1 and 1-2

1-5 through 1

1-23 through 1-26

2- 3 through 2-10

2-13 and 2-14

2-17 and 2-18

2-29 through 2-34

2-39 through 2-76

2-79 through 2-88

2-93 through 2-96

2-99 through 2-102

2-105 through 2-124

Remove pages Insert pages

2-127 and 2-128

2-133 and 2-134

2-137 through 2-144

2-149 through 2-152

2- 157 through 2-172

3-3 through 3-6

3-9 through 3-20

3-25 through 3-28

3-39 through 3-42

A-1

B-1 through B-37

C-1 through C-4

D-1 through D-4

Index 1 through 8

2-127 and 2-128

2-133 and 2-134

2-137 through 2-144

2-149 through 2-152

2- 157 through 2-172

3-3 through 3-6

3-9 through 3-20

3-25 through 3-28

3-39 through 3-42

A-1

B-l through B-37

C-1 through C-4

D-1 through D-4

Index 1 through 8

2. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force:

TM 9-2320-272-10/TO 36A12-I

Official:

E. C. MEYER


Chief of Staff

ROBERT M. JOYCE

Major General, United States Army


Official:

CHARLES A GABRIEL. General, USAF

Chief of 'Staff

JAMES L. WYATT, JR., Colonel, USAF

Director of Administration

Distribution

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38 Operator Maintenance requirements

for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939 Series (Diesel) .

14 MARCH 1983

^)oi,/j:

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL!

1. Do not operate your vehicle engine in enclosed areas.

2. Do not idle vehicle engine with cab windows closed.

3. Do not drive vehicle with inspection plates or cover plates off.

4. Be alert at all times for exhaust odors.

5. Be alert for exhaust poisoning symptoms. They are:

• headache

• dizziness

• sleepiness

• loss of muscular control

6. If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms:

• remove person from area

• expose to open air

• keep person warm

• do not permit person to move

• administer artificial respiration, if necessary*

• notify a medic

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST EXHAUST POISONING IS

ADEQUATE VENTILATION.

WARNING SUMMARY

• Drycleaning solvent is flammable and will not be used near an open flame. A fire

extinguisher will be kept nearby when the solvent is used. Use only in well-

ventilated places. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel and or

damage to equipment.

• Do not touch hot exhaust pipes with bare hands. Severe burns will result.

• Do not perform fuel system check or inspections while smoking or near fire, flame,

or sparks. Fuel could ignite, causing damage to vehicle, severe injury, or death.

• Don't smoke, have open flames, or make sparks around the batteries, especially if

the caps are off. They can explode and cause injury.

• Stay clear of dump body and cab protector at all times during loading and

unloading operations. The dump body can unexpectedly raise when overloaded or

when a heavy load is dropped into the dump body. This can result in serious

injury.

• Always lower outriggers before operating.

• Do not put vehicle in motion until warning light and buzzer stop. Air pressure

gages and should indicate at least 90 psi (620.5 kPa). If warnings continue beyond

three minutes and or pressure gages do not reach 90 psi (620.5 kPa). turn ignition

switch and battery switch to OFF positions and notify organizational maintenance.

A

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING SUMMARY (Cont'd)

• Do not coast downhill with transmission in "N" (neutral). Vehicle may go out of

control.

• Do not remove surge tank filler cap if temperature gage reads above I95°F (90°C).

Do not add coolant when engine is hot unless engine is running. Add coolant

slowly.

• Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not allow cable to run through

hands. Broken wire cause painful injuries.

• Direct all personnel to stand clear of cable. A snapped cable can cause serious

injuries.

• Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate winch at erratic speeds. High

speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped cable.

• Do not lower load without a ground guide. Direct all personnel to stand clear of

lifting operation. Swinging loads can cause serious injury.

• Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts or breaks high

voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high voltage line is in contact with A-frame

or vehicle. Serious or fatal injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have

electrical power turned off.

• Make certain spike cable ring terminal makes good contact with bare metal. If

necessary, scrape clean contact area of dirt, paint, or rust.

• Do not continue with coupling operation if trailer air supply valve fails to engage.

Disconnect air couplings and notify organizational maintenance.

• Make sure troopseat securing pins are engaged before lowering dropside.

• On dropside trucks, make certain forward end of dropsides are engaged before

lowering tailgate.

• Do not operate vehicle on wet, smooth roads with lowered tire inflation. Do not

operate at too great a speed for road conditions. Low tire inflation or excessive

speeds may result in loss of vehicle control on wet. smooth roads.

• Make sure vehicle hand brake is set and wheels are chocked before releasing

springs in spring brakes. Failure to do so may result in vehicle rolling out of

control.

• Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in closed area

occupied by personnel.

• Ground spike must be driven into ground 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 centimeters)

and spike cable connected to the chassis before power can be taken from outside

source.

B

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING SUMMARY (Cont'd)

• Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying brakes until uneven

braking ceases.

• Keep tire from swinging. Serious injury can be caused if personnel are struck by a

swinging tire.

• Keep fingers out from under or directly above the locking end of securing latches

during removal or installation. Serious injury can result if fingers are caught

beneath latches and/ or if fingers are struck by latch when unsnapped.

• Do not open hinged roof and floor panel from outside the van. Push open roof and

floor panel from inside van only.

• Vehicle operation in snow is a hazardous condition. Operators must travel at

reduced speeds and be prepared to meet sudden changes in road conditions and

traffic speeds. Maintain safe stopping distances.

• Block vehicle wheels if operating site is on a grade, no matter how slight.

• Do not attempt to cross water deeper than 78 inches (198 centimeters). Limit

vehicle speed while fording to 3 or 4 miles per hour (5 or 6 kilometers per hour).

• Alcohol used in alcohol evaporator is flammable, poisonous, and explosive. Do not

smoke when adding fluid. Do not drink fluid.

• Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden stops will

cause vehicle wheels to lock, engine to stall and loss of steering.

c

TM 9-2320-272-10

TO 36A12-1C-441

TECHNICAL MANUAL

NO. 9-2320-272-10

TEHNICAL ORDER

NO. 36A12-1C-441

HEADQUARTERS


WASHINGTON, DC 14 MARCH 1983

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

FOR

5-TON M939 SERIES TRUCKS (DIESEL)

MODEL NSN WITHOUT WINCH NSN WITH WINCH

Chassis M939 2320-01-048-2450

Chassis M939 2320-01-047-8744

Chassis M940 2320-01-047-8743

Chassis M941 2320-01-047-8741

Chassis M941 2320-01-047-8742

Chassis M942 2320-01-047-8738

Chassis M942 2320-01-047-8739

Chassis M943 2320-01-047-8740

Chassis M944 2320-01-047-8745

Chassis M945 2320-01-050-4894

Truck, Cargo, Dropside M923 2320-01-050-2084

Truck, Cargo, Dropside M925 2320-01-047-8769

Truck, Cargo M924 2320-01-047-8773

Truck, Cargo M926 2320-01-047-8772

Truck, Cargo, XLWB M927 2320-01-047-8771

Truck, Cargo, XLWB M928 2320-01-047-8770

Truck, Dump M929 2320-01-047-8756

Truck, Dump M930 2320-01-047-8755

Truck, Tractor M931 2320-01-047-8753

Truck, Tractor M932 2320-01-047-8752

Van, Expansible M934 2320-01-047-8750

Van, Expansible, WHLG M935 2320-01-047-8751

Truck, Medium Wrecker M936 2320-01-047-8754

REPORTING OF ERRORS

You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know

of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter,

DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms),

or DA Form 2028-2 located in back of this manual direct to: Commander,

U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command, ATTN: DRSTA-MB, Warren,

Michigan 48090. A reply will be furnished to you.

TA 092258

Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

All abbreviations that appear in this manual are listed below.

BO Blackout

BRT Bright

CC , Cross Country

CW Chain (and) Wire Rope (lubricating oil)

DA Department of Army

DFA Diesel Fuel (arctic)

EIR'S Equipment Improvement Recommendations

GAA Grease Automotive & Artillery

GO ; Gear Oil

GOS Gear Oil (sub-zero)

H Highway

LO Lubrication Order

MAC Maintenance Allocation Charts

NSN National Stock Number

OE/HDO Oil, Engine/ Heavy Duty Oil

OEA Oil, Engine (arctic)

Para Paragraph

PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks & Services

PSI Pounds Per Square Inch

RPM Revolutions (turns) Per Minute

TM Technical Manual

WHLG With Hydraulic Lift Gate

WO/W Without Winch

W/W With Winch

XLWB Extra Long Wheel Base

CM Centimeter

FT Foot

G Gram

GAI Gallon

IN Inch

KM Kilometer

kPa Kilopascals

L Liter

LB Pound

LB-FT Pound-Feet

M Meter

MI Mile

MPG Miles Per Gallon

MPH Miles Per Hour

N»m Newton-Meters

PSI Per Square Inch

PT Pint

QT Quart

YD Yard

TA 090076

ii

TM 9-2320-272-10

MILITARY TERMS AND COMMON TERMS

CROSS REFERENCE LIST

The following is an alphabetical list of commonly used military terms that appear in

this manual. This list is eross-reicrcnccd to commonly understood terms used in

everyday speech that mean the same thing.

Engine Coolant Anti-freeze/ water

Exhaust Stack Tailpipe

Failsafe Unit Warning buzzer

Fording Crossing through water

Grade Steepness of hill

Hydraulics Operated by oil pressure

Inclement Weather Bad weather (rain, snow, high winds)

Indicators Gages, warning lights, etc.

Mired Stuck in mud or snow

Operation Task

Operator Driver

Slaving Jumping batteries

Splash Shields Mud flaps

Transport To carry

Turning Radius Distance needed to make a U-turn

Usual Conditions Good roads, good weather

Para Page

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ii

MILITARY TERMS/COMMON TERMS iii

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION

Section I. General information

Scope 1-1 1-1

Forms and records 1-2 1-2

II. Description and data

General Description 1-3 1-3

Designations 1-4 1-3

Cargo trucks w/dropsides 1-5 1-4

Cargo trucks 1-6 1-6

Cargo trucks w/ extra long wheel bases 1-7 1-8

Dump trucks 1-8 1-10

Tractor trucks 1-9 1-12

Medium wrecker 1-10 1-14

Expansible vans 1-11 1-16

Tabulated data 1-12 1-18

CHAPTER 2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Controls and indicators

Know your controls and indicators 2-1 2-1

Preparation for use 2-2 2-1

Chassis controls and indicators 2-3 2-2

TA 090077

iii

TM 9-2320-272-10

Para Page

Bodv equipment controls, and indicators 2-4 2-13

Medium wrecker 2-4a 2-13

Dump trucks 2-4b 2-17

Cargo trucks 2-4c 2-19

Tractor trucks 2-4d 2-20

Expansible van 2-4e 2-21

Special kits, controls, and indicators 2-5 2-28

A-frame kit 2-5a 2-28

Airbrake kit 2-5b 2-28

Electric brake kit 2-5c 2-29

Arctic winterization kit 2-5d 2-29

Deep water fording kit 2-5e 2-32

Troopseat and paulin kit 2-5f 2-33

Machine gun mount kit 2-5g 2-34

Rifle mount kit 2-5h 2-34

Section II. Preventive maintenance checks and services

General 2-6 2-35

Cleaning instructions and precautions 2-7 2-35

Operator/ crew preventive maintenance

checks and services (PMCS) 2-8 2-37

Oil and gasket leakage 2-9 2-38

II1. Operation under usual conditions

General . . 2-10 2-67

Starting the engine (above +32° F) (0°C ) 2-11 2-67

Cold weather starting (below +32° F) (0°C) 2-12 2-70

Placing and sustaining vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72

Stopping the vehicle and engine 2-14 2-76

Using slave receptacle to start engine 2-15 2-78

Operation of vehicle service lights 2-16 2-79

Raising and securing cab hood 2-17 2-81

General 2- 17a 2-81

Raising and securing hood 2- 17b 2-81

Removing cab top and lowering windshield 2-18 2-82

Operation of front winch 2-19 2-84

Preparation for use 2- 19a 2-84

Unwinding winch cable 2-19b 2-84

Rigging the load 2- 1 9c 2-85

Pulling load 2-19d 2-86

Pulling indirect loads 2-19e 2-87

l ilting and lowering loads 2-19f 2-88

After winch operation 2-1 9g 2-88

Preparing winch for travel 2- 1 9h 2-89

Operation of cargo trucks 2-20 2-90

General 2-20a 2-90

Lowering tailgate 2-20b 2-90

Lowering and raising troopseats 2-20c 2-90

Removing front and side racks 2-20d 2-91

Installing front and side racks 2-20e 2-92

Lowering and raising dropsides 2-20f 2-92

Operation of medium wrecker 2-21 2-94

TA 090078

iv

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table of Contents (Cont'd)

1 Para Page

General 2-2 la 2-94

Front winch operation 2-2 lb 2-94

Rear winch operation 2-2 1c 2-94

Crane operation 2-2 Id 2-100

Towing with wrecker crane 2-2 1 e 2-106

Securing crane after operation 2-2 1 f 2-108

Operation of dump trucks 2-22 2-1 10

Payload capacities 2-22a 2-110

Regular dump operation 2-22b 2-1 1 1

Rocker type dump operation 2-22c 2-1 12

Spreader type dump operation 2-22d 2-113

Operation of tractor and fifth wheel 2-23 2-115

General 2-23a 2-115

Wedge adjustment 2-23b 2-115

Coupling semitrailer 2-23c 2-116

Uncoupling semitrailer 2-23d 2-1 19

Operation of expansible van trucks 2-24 2-122

General 2-24a 2-122

Selecting operating site 2-24b 2-122

Leveling van body 2-24c 2-122

Power lift gate operation 2-24d 2-122

Expanding van body 2-24e 2-124

Operating van electrical system 2-24f 2-128

Operating van heaters 2-24g 2-129

Operating van air conditioner 2-24h 2-130

Blackout operations 2-24i 2-131

Operating power lift gate 2-24j 2-132

Retracting van body 2-24k 2-133

Operation of auxiliary equipment (special purpose kits) 2-25 2-137

General 2-25a 2-137

Operating instructions 2-25b 2-137

Deep water fording kit 2-26 2-138

General 2-26a 2-138

Operator preparation for fording 2-26b 2-138

Fording operation 2-26c 2-139

After fording operation 2-26d 2-140

Troopseat kit 2-27 2-141

General 2-27a# 2-141

Troopseat kit installation 2-27b 2-141

Bow and tarp kit 2-28 2-14? I

Bow and tarp kit installation 2-28a 2-14? I

Raising paulin for ventilation 2-28b 2-145

Bow and tarp kit removal 2-28c 2-145

Arctic winterization kit 2-29 2-149

General 2-29a 2-149

Operating engine compartment covers 2-29b 2-149

Operating fuel burning personnel heater 2-29c 2-150

Operating engine coolant heater 2-29d 2-152

A-frame kit 2-30 2-156

General 2-30a 2-156

Preparation for use 2-30b 2-156

TA 092259

Change 1 v

TM 9-2320-272-10


Para Page

Operating A-frame 2-30c 2-156

Electric brake kit 2-31 2-157

General 2-3 la 2-157

Setting rheostat 2-3 lb 2-157

Electric brake kit operation 2-3 lc 2-157

Airbrake control kit 2-32 2-158

General 2-32a 2-158

Airbrake kit operation 2-32b 2-158

Section IV. Operation under unusual conditions

Special instructions 2-33 2-159

General 2-33a 2-159

Cleaning 2-33b 2-159

Lubrication 2-3 3c 2-159

Driving instructions 2-33d 2-159

Special purpose kits 2-33e 2-159

Reporting materiel failure 2-33f 2-159

Operating in extreme cold 2-34 2-160

General 2-34a 2-160

Before operation 2-34b 2-160

Starting engine 2-34c 2-160

Driving vehicle 2-34d 2-161

Halting or parking 2-34e 2-161

Operating in snow 2-35 2-164

General 2-35a 2-164

Driving vehicle 2-35b 2-164

After operation 2-35c 2-165

Operating in extreme heat 2-36 2-166

General 2-36a 2-166


Driving vehicle 2-36c 2-166

Halting or parking 2-36d 2-168

Operating in dusty, sandy areas 2-37 2-168

General 2-37a 2-168


Halting or parking 2-37c 2-168

Operating under rainy or humid conditions 2-38 2-169

General 2-38a 2-169


Operating in deep mud 2-39 2-170

General 2-39a 2-170



Operating in salt water 2-40 2-171

General 2-40a 2-171

Preparation for fording 2-40b 2-171

Fording operation in salt water 2-40c 2-171

After fording operation 2-40d 2-172

CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section 1. Tools and equipment

Special tools and equipment 3-1 3-1

TA 090080

vi

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table of Contents (Cont'd) Para Page

Basic issue items 3-2 3-1

Expendable supplies and materials 3-3 3-1

Section 11. Lubrication

Lubrication order 3-4 3-1

General lubrication instructions 3-5 3-1

General lubricating instructions under unusal

conditions 3-6 3-1

Lubrication for continued operation below 0°F (-17°C) . 3-7 3-2

Section 111. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting procedures 3-8 3-2

Scope 3-8a 3-2

Omissions 3-8b 3-2

Section IV. Maintenance procedures

General 3-9 3-28

Engine service 3-10 3-28

General 3- 10a 3-28

Engine crankcase oil level 3- 10b 3-28

Coolant surge tank 3-1 0c 3-29

Power steering reservoir 3-1 Od 3-29

Fuel filter 3-10e 3-29

Air cleaner 3-1 Of 3-31

Air reservoirs 3-11 3-33

General 3-1 la 3-33

Service 3-1 lb 3-33

Final inspection 3-1 1c 3-33

Transmission oil level 3-12 3-33

General 3- 12a 3-33

Checking oil level 3- 12b 3-33

Wheels and tires 3-13 3-34

General 3- 13a 3-34

Spare tire removal 3- 13b 3-34

Tire removal 3- 13c 3-35

Replacement 3- 13d 3-37

Tire inflation 3-14 3-38

General 3- 14a 3-38

Tire gaging 3- 14b 3-38

Tire inflation 3- 14c 3-38

Brake service 3-15 3-39

General 3- 15a 3-39

Type of brake 3- 15b 3-39

Releasing the spring 3- 15c 3-39

Radiator fan clutch emergency service 3-16 3-40

General 3- 16a 3-40

Symptoms 3- 16b 3-41

Inspection 3- 16c 3-41

Emergency service 3-16d 3-41

APPENDIX A. REFERENCES

Publication indexes A-l A-l

Military publications A-1 A-1

Other publications A-2 A-1

Technical manuals A-2a A-1

Technical bulletins A-2b A-1

TA 092260

Change 1 vii

TM 9-2320-272-10


Para Page

Cold weather operations A-2c A-1

Lubrication orders A-2d A- 1

Destruction to prevent enemy use A-2e A-1

General A-2f A-1

APPENDIX B. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST

AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Section I. Introduction

Scope B-1 B-1

General B-2 B-l

Integral components of the end item B-2a B-1

Basic issue items B-2b B-1

Explanation of columns B-3 B-1

Item number B-3a B- 1

National stock number B-3b B-1

Description B-3c B-1

Federal supply code for manufacturer (FSCM) B-3d B-1

Part number B-3e B-2

Usable on code B-3f B-2

Quantity required B-3g B-2

Abbreviations B-4 B-3

Section II. Integral components of end item list

General B-5 B-3

Section III. Basic issue items list

General B-6 B-3

APPENDIX C. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

Introduction

Scope C-1 C-1

General C-2 C-1

Explanation of listing C-3 C-l

Descriptions, national stock numbers,

and part numbers C-3a C-1

Unit of measurement C-3b C-l

Quantity authorized C-3c C-l

Additional authorization list C-2

APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST

Introduction

Scope D-1 D-1

Explanation of columns D-2 D-1

Item number D-2a D-1

Level of maintenance D-2b D-1

National stock number D-2c D-1

Description D-2d D-l

Unit of measure (U/M) D-2e D-1

Expendable supplies and materials list D-2

TA 090082

viii

TM 9-2320-272-10

CHAPTER 1

I INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION

1-1. Scope.

a. This manual contains instructions for operating and servicing M939 series

vehicles. These vehicles are:

(1) M923 Cargo Truck, WO/W (Dropside)

(2) M924 Cargo Truck, WO/W

(3) M925 Cargo Truck, W/W (Dropside)

(4) M926 Cargo Truck, W/W

(5) M927 Cargo Truck, WO/W (XLWB)

(6) M928 Cargo Truck, W/W (XLWB)

(7) M929 Dump Truck, WO/W

(<SJ M930 Dump Truck, W/W

f9J M931 Tractor Truck, WO/W

(10) M932 Tractor Truck, W/W

(11) M934 Expansible Van, WO/W

(12) M935 Expansible Van, WO/W (WHLG)

(13) M936 Medium Wrecker, W/W

6. The material presented here provides operators with information and procedures

needed to provide the safest and most efficient operation of these vehicles. This

information includes:

(1) Descriptions of each vehicle and its operation.

(2) The purpose of each vehicle.

(3) Vehicle limitations such as load limits.

(4) Cautions and warnings to operators regarding safety to personnel and

equipment.

TA 092261

Change 1 1-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(5) The function of all panel controls and indicators.

(6) The function of all body controls and indicators.

(7) How and when to use special purpose kits such as the deep water fording kit.

(8) Operator maintenance checks and service procedures.

(9) Troubleshooting procedures to be followed by operators if the vehicle

malfunctions.

(10) Operator forms and records.

NOTE

Operator maintenance is preventive maintenance. It is the duty of

each operator to keep the vehicle operational. These duties

consist of maintenance checks, servicing the vehicle, and simple

troubleshooting. They are not mechanical repairs. Mechanical

repairs of M939 series vehicles are accomplished at the

organizational maintenance level or higher.

1-2. Forms and Records.

a. Vehicle Maintenance Forms and Records. The forms and records that must be

kept up to date by operators are those prescribed by TM 38-750.

b. Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR). EIR's can and must be

submitted by anyone who is aware of an unsatisfactory condition with equipment

design or use. It is not necessary to show a new design or list a better way to perform a

procedure. Simply tell why the current design is unfavorable or why a procedure is

difficult. EIR's can be submitted on DA form SF368 (quality deficiency report). Mail

directly to: Commander, U.S. Army Tank Automotive Command, ATTN: DRSTA-M,

Warren, Michigan 48090. A reply will be furnished to you.

c. Hand Receipt Manual. The hand receipt manual (TM 9-2320-272- 1 0-HR) is a

companion document to this publication. It consists of preprinted hand receipts (DA

form 2062) that list end item related equipment (i.e., COEI, BII, and AAL) you must

account for. As an aid to property accountability, additional -HR manuals may be

requistioned from the following source in accordance with procedures in chapter 3,

AR 310-2: The U.S. Army Adjutant General Publications Center, 1655 Woodson Road,

St. Louis, MO 631 1 4.

TA 092262

1-2 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

Section II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA

1-3. General Description.

a. The 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 series of trucks are tactical vehicles designed for use on all

types of roads, highways and cross-country terrain. These trucks also operate in

extreme temperatures such as arctic weather conditions. The M939 series trucks are an

improved version of the M809 series trucks. The improvements make M939 trucks

more reliable and easier to operate. These major improvements are:

(1) An Automatic Transmission

(2) An Improved Power Steering System

(3) A Complete Air Brake System

(4) An Improved Cooling System

(5) An Improved Electrical System

(6) A 3-Crew Member Cab

(7) A Tilt Hood

(8) A Hydraulically Powered Front Winch

b. All vehicles in the M939 series employ the same 250 horsepower engine and the

same automatic transmission. Truck cabs have removable canvas tops. Cargo trucks in

the series are provided with bows, removable canvas tops, and end flaps. All vehicles

are equipped with a spare wheel mounted rear of cab and a pintle hook used for

towing.

1-4. Designations.

a. These trucks are called 5-ton. 6x6. M939 series vehicles.

(1) The "5-ton" refers to the vehicles1 load limit rating.

(2) The "6x6" means that each vehicle has six wheel ends and all six are capable of

driving.

(3) The "M939" is simply a code number given to this series of trucks to

distinguish this series from others.

b. The 5-ton load limit rating of M939 series trucks does not mean these trucks are

limited to 5-ton payloads. A vehicle rating only indicates the maximum amount of

cargo weight the vehicle's axles and frame can withstand when operating under the

worst cross-country conditions. Under good conditions such as an improved highway,

these trucks can safely carry payloads up to two times the rated payload.

TA 090085

1-3

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-5. Cargo Trucks With Dropsides: M923 WO/W and M925 W/W.

M923 WO/W

M925 W/W

TA 090086

1-4

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M923 cargo truck and M925 cargo

truck is that the M923 does not have a front winch and the M925 does. This difference

affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight

• Shipping Dimensions

• Turning Radius

• Approach Angle

• Special Winch-Assisted Operations

it docs not affect the basic purpose or performance of the vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M923 and M925 dropside cargo trucks are used to

transport payloads of up to 20,000 pounds (9.080 kilograms) on the highway and 10,000

pounds (4.540 kilograms) cross country. Fully loaded, each will tow an additional

trailer load of up to 30,000 pounds (13.620 kilograms) on the highway and 15.000

pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross country. Both truck bodies provide 550 cubic feet (15.4

cubic meters) of cargo space. Their hinged steel sides fold down and out of the way of

loading and unloading operations. Troop seats may be positioned for troop transport

operations. The M925 is equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more

versatile for operations under difficult field conditions.

c. Performance. Fully loaded M923 and M925 dropside cargo trucks can achieve a

maximum speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). They will climb road

grades as steep as 23 degrees with maximum bed and trailer loads. Without loads, they

will handle grades up to 34 degrees. The vehicles ford hard-bottom water crossings up

to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 78 inches

(198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Their maximum cruising range with fully-loaded beds

and trailers is 300 miles (483 kilometers). Without trailers, the vehicles cover 350 miles

(563 kilometers) per tank of diesel fuel. The turning radius of the M923 is 38 feet

( 1 1 .6 meters). The turning radius of the M925 truck is 39 feet (11.9 meters).

d. Special Limitations. None.

e. Special Instructions in this Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo

trucks).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20. operation of cargo trucks.

(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28. bow and tarp kit.

TA 092263

Change 1 1-5

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-6. Cargo Trucks: M924 WO/W and M926 W/W

M924 WO/W

M926 W/W

TA 090088

1-6

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M924 cargo truck and the M926

cargo truck is that the M924 does not have a front winch and the M926 does. This

difference affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight


' • Turning Radius

• Approach Angle

• Special Winch-Assisted Operations.

It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the

vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M924 and M926 cargo trucks are used to transport

equipment, materials, and/or personnel. These trucks are the same basic trucks as the

M923 and M925 cargo trucks. However. M924 and M926 cargo trucks have permanent

steel-welded sides. For this reason, they are preferred vehicles for use in transporting

bulky payloads that may shift weight during transit. M924 and M926 load limits on

highways and cross country are the same as those of M923 and M925. Both trucks

provide 550 cubic feet (15.4 cubic meters) of cargo space. Both use a troop seat kit for

troop transport operations. The M926 is equipped with a front winch. This feature

makes the M926 truck more versatile for operations under difficult field conditions.

c. Performance. The performance characteristics are the same as those of the cargo

trucks with dropsides. The turning radius of the M924 truck is 38 feet (1 1.6 meters). The

turning radius of the M926 truck is 39 feet (I 1.9 meters).

(/. Special Limitations. M924 and M926 cargo trucks are not suited for operations

that require easy side access to cargo. An example of this is a ground-to-truck forklift

operation. In such an operation, cargo trucks with dropsides are preferred.


(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4. body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo

trucks).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20. operation of cargo trucks.

(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28. bow and tarp kit.

TA 092264

Change 1 1-7

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-7. Cargo Trucks With Extra Long Wheel Bases (XLWB): M927 WO/W and

M928 W/W.

M927 WO/W

M928 W/W

TA 090090

1-8

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M927 cargo truck (XLWB) arid

M928 cargo truck (XLWB) is that the M927 does not have a front winch and the M928

does. This difference affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight


• Turning Radius

• Approach Angle



vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M927 and M928 cargo trucks have the same load

capacities as those of the M923, M924, M925, and M926 cargo trucks already

discussed. However, truck beds on M927 and M928 vehicles are 76 inches (193

centimeters) longer. This provides each vehicle with 194 more cubic feet (5.4 cubic

meters) of cargo space. M927 and M928 cargo trucks are specifically designed to

transport equipment and materials that take up more cargo space per pound. The total

cargo space provided by M927 and M928 cargo trucks is 744 cubic feet (20.8 cubic

meters). The vehicles have permanent steel-welded sides. Troop seats may be positioned

for troop transport operations. The M928 is equipped with a front winch. This feature

makes it more versatile under difficult field conditions.

c Performance. Fully loaded, M927 and M928 cargo trucks will climb road grades

as steep as 21 degrees. Without trailer loads, they will handle grades up to 31 degrees.

Their maximum speeds, fording depths and miles they will go per tank of fuel are the

same as the M923, M924, M925, and M926 cargo trucks. The turning radius of the

M927 truck is 45 feet 2 inches (13.8 meters). The turning radius of the M928 truck is 46

feet 2 inches (14.1 meters).

d. Special Limitations. M927 and M928 cargo trucks are not suited for operations

requiring easy side access to cargo or maneuverability in limited spaces because of their

longer lengths.


(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (c. cargo

trucks).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-20, operation of cargo trucks.

(3) Refer to paragraph 2-28, bow and tarp kit.

TA 092265

Change 1 1-9

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-8. Dump Trucks: M929 WO/W and M930 W/W.

M929 WO/W

M930 W/W

TA 090092

1-10

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M929 dump truck and the M930

dump truck is that the M929 does not have a front winch and the M930 does. This

difference affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight


• Turning Radius

• Approach Angle

• Special, Winch-Assisted Operations


vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M929 and M930 dump trucks are used to transport

materials such as sand, gravel, and stone. They may also haul scrap, rubble or other

waste materials. These vehicles operate on or off the road with load limits up to 20,000

pounds (9,080 kilograms) on the highway and 10,000 pounds (4,540 kilograms) cross

country. Fully loaded, these vehicles can tow trailers with additional loads up to 30,000

pounds (13,620 kilograms) on the highway and 15,000 pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross

country. Each vehicle has a welded-steel dump body. The forward end of the solid

dump body extends up and over the vehicle cab to protect it from damage during

loading. Troop seats may be positioned for troop transport operations. The M930 is

equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more versatile under difficult field

conditions.

c. Performance. Under maximum loads, M929 and M930 dump trucks climb road

grades as steep as 17 degrees. Without trailer loads, they handle grades up to 30 degrees.

Maximum speed is 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). The vehicles can ford

hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water

fording kit and 78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Both trucks are equipped with

dual fuel tanks. This extends the cruising range of these vehicles to 400 miles (644

kilometers) with loads and 480 miles (772 kilometers) empty. The turning radius of the

M929 truck is 35 feet 6 inches (10.9 meters). The turning radius of the M930 truck is

36 feet 6 inches (11.2 meters).

d. Special Limitations. None.


(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (b. dump

trucks).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-22, operation of dump trucks.

(3) Refer to paragraph 2-27, troopseat kit.

(4) Refer to paragraph 2-28, bow and tarp kit.

TA 092266

Change 1 1-11

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-9. Tractor Trucks: M931 WO/W and M932 W/W.

M931 WO/W

M932 W/W

TA 090094

1-12

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M931 tractor truck and the M932

tractor truck is that the M931 does not have a front winch and the M932 does. This

difference affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight


• Turning Radius

• Approach Angle



vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M931 and M932 tractor trucks are fifth wheel vehicles

used to haul semitrailer loads up to 37,500 pounds (17,025 kilograms) cross country and

55,000 pounds (24,970 kilograms) on the highway. Each vehicle is also equipped with a

pintle hook for hauling eye-hook trailer loads up to 15,000 pounds (6,810 kilograms)

cross country and 30,000 pounds (13,620 kilograms) on the highway. The M932 tractor

truck is equipped with a front winch. This feature makes it more versatile in tactical

operations under difficult field conditions.

c. Performance. Fully loaded, M931 and M932 tractor trucks reach a maximum

speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). They will climb road grades as

steep as 23 degrees with fully loaded semitrailers. The vehicles can ford hard bottom

water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and

78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Their maximum cruising range fully loaded is

300 miles (483 kilometers). Without trailers, these trucks will cover 350 miles (563

kilometers) per tank of diesel fuel. The turning radius of the M931 is 35 feet 6 inches

(10.9 meters). The turning radius of the M932 is 36 feet 6 inches (1 1.2 meters).

d. Special Limitations. Fifth wheel cannot pivot more than 21 degrees up, 15 degrees

down or 7 degrees sideways. For this reason, semitrailer operations cross country are

limited to easy grades over known terrain.


(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (d. tractors).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-23, operation of tractor and fifth wheel.

TA 092267

Change 1 1-13

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-10. Medium Wrecker: M936 W/W.

M936 W/W (LEFT SIDE VIEW)

M936 W/W (RIGHT SIDE VIEW)

TA 090096

1-14

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M936 medium wrecker is used to return disabled

vehicles lor repair. It is also used to free mired vehicles and in crane operations of up

to 20.000 pounds (9.080 kilograms). Some examples of M936 crane operations are:

(1) Removing and replacing engines, power packs, and gun tubes.

(2) Loading and unloading of munitions such as missiles.

b. Performance. With or without a towed load, the M936 medium wrecker will reach

a maximum speed of 52 miles per hour (84 kilometers per hour). The truck is equipped

with dual fuel tanks. These two tanks extend the vehicle's cruising ranges to 400 miles

(644 kilometers) with a towed load and 500 miles (804 kilometers) without. While

towing, this vehicle will climb road grades as steep as 1 7 degrees. Without a load, it can

handle grades as steep as 25 degrees. The vehicle's wrecker crane rotates 270 degrees

with 45 degrees of elevation. Turning radius of the M936 is 39 feet (I 1.9 meters).

c. Special Limitations. The crane and winch load limits of the M936 wrecker arc:

(1) Crane fw/outriggers) 20.000 lbs. ( 9.080 kg.)

(2) Front winch 20.000 lbs. ( 9.080 kg.)

(3) Rear winch 45.000 lbs. (20.250 kg.)

(I. Special Instructions in this Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4. body equipment, controls, and indicators (a. medium

wrecker).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-21. operation of medium wrecker.

TA 092268

Change 1 1-15

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-11. Expansible Vans: M 934 and M935.

M934

M935 (WHLG)

TA 092269

1-16 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

a. Differences. The only difference between the M934 expansible van and the M935

expansible van is that the M934 does not have a rear hydraulic liftgate and the M935

does. This difference affects:

• Vehicle Length

• Vehicle Weight


It also affects its basic purpose. The 5-ton, 6x6 expansible van with hydraulic

liftgate transports heavier, more delicate electronic equipment than the van without a

liftgate. Aside from this, the basic purpose, performance, and special limitations of both

vehicles are the same.

b. Purpose of the Vehicles. M934 and M935 expansible vans transport electronic

base stations into the field. In the traveling position, van truck bodies are 17 feet

long x 8 feet wide (5.2 meters long x 2.4 meters wide). Once in the field the sides are

expanded to give it a width of nearly 14 feet (4.3 meters). They may serve as

communication stations or electronic repair stations. The vans are designed to carry up

to 5,000 pounds (2,270 kilograms) of equipment into the field and up to 15,000 pounds

(6,810 kilograms) on roads. They can also haul additional trailer loads of up to 15,000

pounds (6,810 kilograms) cross country and 30,000 pounds (13,620 kilograms) on

highways. The M935 expansible van is equipped with a hydraulic liftgate (WHLG).

This feature makes it the preferred vehicle to use when heavy, delicate electronic

equipment has to be moved in and/or out of the van.

c. Performance. The maximum speed of M934 and M935 vans is 52 miles per hour

(84 kilometers per hour). Under maximum loads, both vans climb road grades as steep

as 22 degrees. Without trailer loads, they handle grades up to 33 degrees. Fully loaded,

their maximum cruising range is 300 miles (483 kilometers) per tank of fuel. Without

the trailer load, the van cruising range is 350 miles (563 kilometers) per tank. Both

vehicles ford hard-bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) without a

deep water fording kit and 78 inches (198.1 centimeters) with the kit. Both the M934

and M935 expansible vans have a turning radius of 45 feet 2 inches ( 13.8 meters).

d. Special Limitations.

(1) Vans must be positioned on firm or near-firm soil before expanding sides.

(2) Hydraulic liftgate cannot raise equipment weighing more than 3,000 pounds

(1,362 kilograms).


(1) Refer to paragraph 2-4, body equipment, controls, and indicators (e. expansible

van).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-24, operation of expansible van trucks.

TA 092270

Change 1 1-17

TM 9-2320-272-10

1-12. Tabulated Data. |

This paragraph organizes vehicle specifications, special equipment and model

differences in table form for easy reference by operators.

a. Specifications.

1. Vehicle Dimensions. See table 1-1.

2. Weights. See table 1-2.

3. Chassis Dimensions. See table 1-3.

4. Shipping Dimensions. See table 1-4.

5. Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions. See table 1-5.

B 6. General Service Data. See table 1-6.

7. Tire Inflation Data. See table 1-7.

8. Engine and Radiator Data. See table 1-8.

9. Automatic Transmission Data. See table 1-9.

10. Winch and Crane Data. See table 1-10.

//. Differences Between Models. See table 1-1 1.

Table 1-1. Vehicle Dimensions.

Height

Length Overall Height Overall Minimum Reducible

Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters

M923 307.4 780.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M924 307.4 780.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M925 329.1 835.9 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M926 328.9 835.4 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M927 383.4 973.8 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M928 404.9 1028.4 116 294.6 91.2 231.6

M929 273 693.4 117.5 298.4 117.5 298.4

M930 294.5 748 117.5 298.4 117.5 298.4

M931 272.6 692.4 111.8 284.1 91.2 231.6

M932 286 726.4 111.8 284.1 91.2 231.6

M934 365.0 927.1 136.5 346.7 136.5 346.7

M935 371.0 942.3 136.5 346.7 136.5 346.7

M936 362.2 920 106 269.2 106 269.2

Vehicle

Width Overall

Under Axle

Ground Clearance

Under Chassis

Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters

All 98.0 248.9 11.5 29.2 10.5 26.7

TA 092271

1-18 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-2. Weights.

Empty Highway

Maximum Payload

Cross-Country

Vehicle Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms

M923 22,357 10,150 20,000 9.080 10,000 4.540

M924 23,337 10,595 20.000 9,080 10.000 4.540

M925 24.080 10,932 20.000 9,080 10,000 4.540

M926 24,060 10,923 20,000 9,080 10.000 4,540

M927 27,749 12,598 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540

M928 27,811 12,626 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540

M929 25,888 11,753 20,000 9,080 10.000 4.540

M930 26,624 12,087 20.000 9,080 10.000 4,540

M931 22,089 10,028 25,000* 11,350* 15.000* 6.810*

M932 22,841 10,370 25,000* 11,350* 15.000* 6,810*

M934 29,946 13,595 15.000 6.!$10 5.000 2,270

M935 31,851 14,460 15.000 6,1410 5.000 2,270

M936 39,334 17,858 12.000** 5.448** 7.000** 3,178**

Highway

Maximum Towed Load (Pintle)

Cross Country

Vehicle Pounds Kilograms Pounds Kilograms

M923 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M924 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M925 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M926 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810

M927 30.000 13.620 15,000 6,810

M928 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810

M929 30,000 13.620 15,000 6,810

M930 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M93I 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M932 30,000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M934 30.000 13.620 15.000 6,810

M935 30.000 13.620 1 5.000 6,810

M936 30.000

Maximum Towed Load (Fifth Wheel)

20,i )00 9,080

Vehicle Pounds

Highway

Kilograms Pounds

Cross Country

Kilograms

M931 55,000 24.970 37.500 17,025

M932 55.000 24.970 37,500 17,025

*Payload weight on fifth wheel.

**On crane w/boom shipper braced and secured.

TA 090101

1-19

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-3. Chassis Dimensions.

Wheel Base Chassis Length

Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters

M923 179 454.7 307.5 781

M924 179 454.7 304.7 773.9

M925 179 454.7 326.5 829.3

M926 179 454.7 326.5 829.3

M927 215 546.1 380.9 967.4

M928 215 546.1 402.3 1,021.8

M929 167 424.2 256.9 652.5

M930 167 424.2 278.4 707.1

M93! 167 424.2 265 673.1

M932 167 424.2 278.4 707.1

M934 215 546.1 360 914.4

M935 215 546.1 360 914.4

M936 179 454.7 322.7 819.6

Angle (Degrees) of Turning Radius

Vehicle Approach Departure Feet/Inches Meters

M923 46° 37° 38'0" 11.6

M924 46° 37° 38'0" 11.6

M925 31° 37° 39 '0" 11.9

M926 31° 37° 39'0" 1 1.9

M927 46° 22.5° 45 7" 13.8

M928 31° 22.5° 462" 14.1

M929 46° 60° 35'6" 10.9

M930 31° 60° 36'6" 11.2

M931 46° 68° 35'6" 10.9

M932 31° 63° 36'6" 11.2

M934 46° 24° 45 '2" 13.8

M935 46° 24° 45 '2" 13.8

M936 31° 37° 39 '0" 1 1.9

TA 090102

1-20

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-4. Shipping Dimensions.

Shipping Height Shipping Weight

Vehicle Inches Centimeters Pounds Kilograms

M923 91.2 231.6 22.878 10.386

M924 91.2 231.6 22,858 10,377

M925 91.2 231.6 23.603 10.715

M926 91.2 231.6 23,583 10,706

M927 91.2 231.6 26.607 12,079

M928 91.2 231.6 27,331 12,408

M929 1 17.5 298.4 25.136 1 1,41 1

M930 1 17.5 298.4 25,861 1 1,740

M931 91.2 231.6 21,353 9,694

M932 91.2 231.6 22,079 10,023

M934 136.5 346.7 29,437 13,364

M935 136.5 346.7 31,345 14,230

M936 106.0 269.2 38,466 17.463

Shipping Cubage Shipping Tonnage

Vehicle Cubic Ft. Cubic Meters Tons Metric Tons

M923 1,591.0 44.5 1 1.4 10.3

M924 1.591.0 44.5 1 1.4 10.3

M925 1.690.0 47.3 1 1.8 10.7

M926 1,656.0 46.3 1 1.8 10.7

M927 1.971.0 55.1 13.3 12.1

M928 2,082.0 58.2 13.6 12.3

M929 1.819.0 50.9 12.5 11.4

M930 1,962.0 54.9 12.9 11.7

M931 1,371.0 38.3 10.7 9.7

M932 1,480.0 41.4 11.0 10.0

M934 2,780.0 77.8 14.7 13.3

M935 2,906.0 81.4 15.7 14.2

M936 2.135.0 59.7 19.2 17.4

TA 090103

1-21

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-5. Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions

Vehicle Description

Capacity

Standard Metric

In Normal

Operating Conditions

+32°F to +90°F

(0°C to 32.2°C)

All Cooling System 47 quarts 44.46 liters 1 12 Ethylene Gly

col, 1/2 Water

All Engine (crankcase

only)

23 quarts 21.75 liters OE/HDO 30


with new filter)

27 quarts 25.54 liters OE/HDO 30

M923.M924,

M925,M926,

M927,M928,

M934,M935

Fuel Tank

(single tank)

81 gallons 306.6 liters Diesel Fuel (grades

DF1,DF2, or

DFA)

M936 Fuel Tanks

(dual tanks)

139 gallons 526.17 liters Diesel Fuel (grades

DF1.DF2. or

DFA)

M929,M930,

M931.M932

Fuel Tanks

(dual tanks)

1 16 gallons 439.1 liters Diesel Fuel

(grades DFI,DF2,

or DFA)

M925.M926

M928,M932

Hydraulic

System

8.75 gallons 33.1 liters OE/HDO 10

M929 Hydraulic

System

5 gallons 18.9 liters OE/HDO 10

M930 Hydraulic

System

6.25 gallons 23.6 liters OE/HDO 10

M935 Hydraulic

System

3.5 gallons 13.2 liters OE HDO 10

M936 Hydraulic

System

100 gallons 378.4 liters OE/HDO 10

All Differentials

(each)

12 quarts 1 1.3 liters GO 80/90

All Steering System 5 quarts 4.7 liters OE/HDO 10

All Transmission

(W/PTO)

17 quarts

19 quarts

16.0 liters

17.9 liters

OE/HDO 10

OE/HDO

All Transfer Case 6.5 quarts 6.1 liters GO 80/90

All W/ Front

Winch

Winch Gear

Case (front

winch)

2.6 pints 1.23 liters GO 80/90

M936 Winch Gear

Case (rear winch)

3 pints 1.41 liters GO 80/90

All Windshield

Washer

4 quarts 3.78 liters 1 /3 Cleaning

Compound,

2/3 Water

TA 090104

1-22

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-6. General Service Data •

Vehicle Description +90°F(+32°C) +40°F to -10°F

(+4° to -23°C)

0°Fto-65°F

(-17°C to-54°C)

Arctic

Conditions

All Cooling System 1/2 Ethylene

Glycol

1/2 Water

1 1 2 Ethylene

Glycol

1/2 Water

2/3 Ethylene

Glvcol

1/3 Water


only)

OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA

All Fuel Tank(s) DF1,DF2 or

DFA

DFl or DFA DFA

-M9-207

All Hydraulic

Systems

OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA

RefertoI

All

All

Differentials

(each)

GO 80/90

OE/HDO 10

GO 80/90

OE/HDO 10

GO 75

OEASteering System

All Transmission OE/HDO 10 OE/HDO 10 OEA

All Transfer Case GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75

All W/

Winch

Winch Gear

Case

GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75

All Windshield

Washer

1/3 Cleaning

Compound

2/3 Water

1/2 Cleaning

Compound

1/2 Water

2/3 Cleaning

Compound

I/3 Water

Table 1-7. Tire Inflation Data.

PRESSURE RATING

FRONT REAR

VEHICLE

(TIRE SIZE)

Standard Metric

(psi) (kPa)

H CC H CC

Standard Metric

(psi) (kPa)

H CC H CC

M923,M924,M925,M926,

M927,M928,M929,M930,

M931,M932,M934,M935

80 60 551 413 50 30 344 206

M936 (ll:00x 20) 70 60 482 413

25 25 172 172

70 60 48 2 413

25 25 172 172

All Models: Mud, Sand

and Snow

H: Highway

CC: Cross Country

TA 092272

Change 1 1-23

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-8. Engine and Radiator Data

ENGINE (NHC 250)

Type Diesel, naturally-aspirated, liquid cooled

Cylinders 6 (in-line)

Brake Horsepower 240 horsepower at 2100 rpm

Idle Speed (engine rpm) 625 ± 25 rpm

Operating Speed (engine rpm) 1500-2100 rpm

Oil Pressure at Idle 15 psi (103.4 kPa)

Oil Pressure at Full Power 55-75 psi (379.2-517.1 kPa)

Coolant (normal operating temperature) 165°F to I95°F (73° C to 90°C)

Fuel Consumption (approximate) 3-4 mpg (1.28-1.70 kilometers per liter)

COOLING SYSTEM

Surge Tank Cap Pressure 14 pounds per square inch (96.5 kilopascals)

Thermostat:

Starts to Open 175°F (79°C)

Fully Open 185°F (85°C)

Radiator Crossflow Type

Fan 26 inches (660 millimeters), 6-blade

Table 1-9. Automatic Transmission Data

TRANSMISSION (MT654)

Oil Type OE/HDO 10

Oil Capacity 4.25 Gallons (16.08 liters)

Oil Temperature:

Maximum 325°F(I63°C)

Normal Operating Temperature 160°F to 220°F(71°C to 104 °C)

Power Takeoff Converter Driven

TRANSMISSION DRIVING RANGE SELECTION

CAUTION

Do not back up vehicle with transfer in low range.

Range

Selection Conditions

Maximum Speeds

W/Transfer Case

in HIGH in LOW

"R" (Reverse)

"N" (Neutral)

"1-5" (Drive)

"1-4" (Fourth)

"1-3" (Third)

"1-2" (Second)!

"1" (First)

Easy grades clear of traffic with ground guide

Good roads, grades, traffic conditions

Moderate grades, traffic, restricted speed limits

Moderate grades,heavy traffic, restricted speed limits

Steep grades, heavy traffic, rough terrain

Starting heavy loads, extreme grades, rough terrain

5 mph

(8 kph)

52 mph

(84 kph)

43 mph

(69 kph)

33 mph

(53 kph)

25 mph

(40 kph)

12 mph

(19 kph)

22 mph

(35 kph)

17 mph

(27 kph)

13 mph

(21 kph)

10 mph

(16 kph)

5 mph

(8 kph)

TA 092273

1-24 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 1-10. Winch and Crane Data

Vehicle Description

Capacities

Standard Metric Ref Para

M925,M926 Front Winch:

M928,M930 Max. Load 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-19

M932 Cable Length 200 ft. 61 Meters

M936 Front Winch: 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-19

Max Load 280 ft. 85.4 Meters

Cable Length

M936 Rear Winch:

Max. Load 45,000 lbs. 20,430 Kilograms 2-2 lc

Cable Length 350 ft. 106.75 Meters

M936 Boom:

Max. Load (w/boom jacks) 20,000 lbs. 9,080 Kilograms 2-2 Id

Rotation with Stop: 270°

Retracted Length: 10 Ft. 3.05 Meters

Extended Length: 18 Ft. 5.5 Meters

Cable Length: 95 ft. 5 in. 29.11 Meters

b. Differences Between Models. The major equipment and functional differences

between models are given in table 1-11. For illustrations and descriptions, refer to the

following:

• Illustration of each model (refer to paras 1-5 through 1-1 1).

• Description of equipment (see description/reference column in table 1-11).

TA 092274

Change 1 1-25

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table I -II. Differences Between Models.

Equipment/

FunctionM9M M9M

M929 M926

M9M

M928 M929 M990 M991 M932 M9992

M9M

M996

Descrip

tion

(Para/

Page)

Personnel /Cargo

Operations

X X X X X X X X 2-20/2-90

2-27/2-I4I

Wrecker Operations X 2-21/2-94

Dump Operations X X 2-22/2-lK)

Fifth Wheel Operations X X 2-23/2-N5

Communications/

Electronic Repair

Operations X X 2-24/2- 1 22

Front Winch X X X X X X X 2-I9/2-X4

Rear Winch X 2-21/ 2-94

Wheel Bases:

179 in. (454.6 cm)

377.8 in. (959.6 cm)

167 in. (424.2 cm)

215 in. (546.1 cm)

X X X X

X X

X X X X

X X

X 1-12/1-20

1-12/ 1-20

1-12/ 1-20

1-12/1-20

Floodlights X 2-4/2-14

Body:

Cargo Dropside

Cargo (permanent

sides)

X

X

X

X X X

2-20/2-90

2-20/2-90

Dump X X 2-22/2-110

Tractor X X 2-23/2-115

Van X X 2-24/2-122

Crane X 2-21/2-94

Heat/ Air Conditioned

Body X X 2-24/2-122

Brake Lock X 2-21/2-95

Fuel Tanks:

Single Tanks

Dual (116 gal.) (439 1)

Dual )139 gal.) (526 1)

X X X X X X

X X X X

X X

X

1-12/1-22

1-12/ 1-22

1-12/ 1 -22

Hydraulic Liftgate X 2-24/2-122

TA 092275

1-26 Change 1

CHAPTER 2

TM 9-2320-272-10

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

2-1 . Know Your Controls and Indicators. | Before you attempt to operate your

equipment, be sure you are familiar with the loeation and function of all controls and

indicators. The location and function of your controls and indicators are described in

this section as follows:

a. Chassis Controls and Indicators: paragraph 2-3.

b. Body Equipment. Controls, and Indicators: paragraph 2-4.

c. Special Kits, Controls, and Indicators: paragraph 2-5.

NOTE

• Except where specifically noted, the controls and indicators

in this section are generally applicable to all vehicles

covered in this manual.

• In this manual, the term "left" indicates the driver side of

the vehicle. The term "right" indicates the opposite, or crew

side of the vehicle.

2-2. Preparation for Use.) When a vehicle is first received by the using organization,

it is the responsibility of the officer-in-charge to determine whether it has been properly

prepared for service by the supplier. It is also the responsibility of the officer-in-charge

to be sure the vehicle is in condition to perform its functions. Organizational

maintenance will provide any additional service required to bring the vehicle to

operating standards. Whenever practical, the operator will assist with this service.

TA 090109

2-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-3. Chassis Controls and Indicators.

Key Item Key Item

1 Air filter indicator

2 Parking brake warning light

3 Low air pressure warning light

4 Spring brake warning light

5 Engine coolant temperature warning light

6 Front wheel drive engagement light

7 High beam indicator

8 Throttle control

9 Battery switch

Key Item and Function

1 Air filter indicator shows red when engine air filter needs servicing.

2 Parking brake warning light illuminates when parking brakes are engaged.

3 Low air pressure w arning light illuminates when airbrake system pressure drops below

60 psi (413 kPa).

4 Spring brake warning light illuminates when spring parking brakes are engaged.

5 Engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates when engine coolant

temperature exceeds 200° F (93° C). Normal engine coolant operating temperature is

1 65° F to 1 95° F ( 74° C to 90° C).

6 Front wheel drive engagement light illuminates when front wheel drive lock-in switch

is engaged.

7 High beam indicator illuminates when front headlights are on high beam.

TA 0901 10

10 Ignition switch

1 1 Tachometer

12 Speedometer

13 Engine coolant temperature gage

14 Primary air pressure gage

15 Del roster control lever

16 Heat vent control lever

17 Fresh air vent control lever

IS Spring brake release control

«

2-2

TM 9-2320-272-10

8 Throttle control sets engine speed at desired rpm without maintaining pressure on

foot pedal. Throttle control locks in desired position when pulled out. Rotating

control handle clockwise or counterclockwise unlocks it.

9 Battery switch activates all electrical circuits on or off except arctic heaters. |

10 Ignition switch has OFF, RUN, and START positions. Switch automatically

returns from START to RUN when hand pressure is released.

1 1 Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute and operating hours

in tenths.

12 SpeedometerIodometer indicates vehicle speed and total mileage. |

13 Engine coolant temperature gage indicates engine coolant temperature. Normal

operating temperature is 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90°C).

14 Primary air pressure gage indicates air pressure in the primary brake system.

Normal pressure is 120 psi (827 kPa).

15 Defroster control lever opens vents to direct heated air at the windshield.

16 Heat vent control lever controls the amount of heat blown into the cab by

adjusting the opening of heat ventilation doors.

17 Fresh air vent control lever pulls out to open ventilation doors, allowing outside

air to circulate in the cab.

18 Spring brake release control is pushed in to release spring parking brakes

independently of the mechanical parking brake. Control is used to release spring

parking brakes in order to test and adjust mechanical brake.

TA 092276

Change 1 2-3

TM 9-2320-272-10

Key Item Key Item

1 Battery gage 1 1

2 Secondary air pressure gage 12

3 Transmission oil temperature gage

4 Engine oil pressure gage 13

5 Fuel gage 14

6 Wrecker warning light switch (M936 only) 15

7 Trailer air supply valve 16

8 Emergency stop 17

9 Brake lock (M936 only) 18

10 Heater blower motor switch


Wiper motor switches

Fuel tank selector switch

(dual tank vehicles only)

Front wheel drive lock-in switch

Ether start switch

Light switch

Windshield washer control

Turning signal control lever

Horn button

1 Battery gage indicates charging condition of the battery.

2 Secondary air pressure gage indicates air pressure in the secondary brake system.

Normal pressure is 120 psi (827 kPa).

3 Transmission oil temperature gage indicates temperature of transmission oil.

Normal operating temperature is 160°F to 220° F (77° C to 104°C).

4 Engine oil pressure gage indicates oil pressure when engine is running. Normal

operating pressure at idle is 15 psi (103 kPa). Normal operating pressure with

vehicle in motion is 55 to 75 psi (379 to 517 kPa).

5 Fuel gage indicates fuel level in fuel tank (s).

6 Wrecker warning light switch (M936 only) controls operation of amber warning

light used during crane operations or while towing disabled vehicle.

7 Trailer air supply valve pushes in to supply air to the brake system of towed

trailer or semitrailer.

8 Emergency stop is pulled out to cut off fuel to engine. Stop is used only in an

emergency.

9 Brake lock (M936 only) is used during crane operations to lock all vehicle service

brakes.

10 Heater blower motor switch activates heater motor and blower.

TA 092277

2-4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

1 1 Wiper motor switches actuate wipers and control windshield wiper speed.

12 Fuel tank selector sw itch (dual tank vehicles only) permits reading fuel level on

the fuel gage for each fuel tank when turned L(left) or R(right).

13 Front w heel drive lock-in sw itch allows operator to engage front wheel drive and

is used only when vehicle is in HIGH transfer range. In LOW transfer range, the

vehicle's front wheel drive engages automatically. Vehicle may be in motion or

stopped to engage front wheel drive lock-in switch.

14 Fther start switch injects ether into engine for cold weather starting.

15 Light sw itch controls operation of vehicle lights.

16 Windshield w asher control s pushed in to spray cleaning solution on front windshield.

17 Turning signal control lever is moved down to operate vehicle left turn signals, up

to operate right turn signals.

18 Horn button is pressed to operate vehicle horn.

19 Instrument panel lights illuminate instrument panel gages.

20 Grab handle aids crewmembers in entering and exiting vehicle cab. Handle is also

a brace lor crewmembers during travel.

26 Wing nut is tightened to hold window

in open position.

TA 090113

2-5

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Automatic transmission shift lever is used to select vehicle driving gear.

2 Transmission pow er takeoff control lever engages transmission to provide power

for auxiliary equipment.

3 Front winch control lever (winch-equipped vehicles only) is pulled to wind front

winch.

4 Cowl ventilator (one on each side of cab) is opened by vent control lever located

on the instrument panel to provide ventilation.

5 Transfer shift lever is pushed down to HIGH for light load operations, up to

LOW for heavy load operations. Six-wheel drive is achieved automatically when

transfer shift lever is placed in LOW.

6 Mechanical hand brake contol lever is pulled up to engage parking brakes and

down to disengage brakes. Knob on top of handle is turned clockwise to increase

braking action, counterclockwise to decrease braking action. When hand brake

lever is engaged, it also trips valve to release air pressure from emergency spring

brakes. This engages emergency spring brakes.

7a Transfer power takeoff control lever is engaged to provide power to crane and

rear winch (M936).

7b Dump body control lever (M929, M930) is moved forward to raise dump body

and back to lower dump body.

8 Accelerator pedal controls engine speed.

9 Brake pedal is depressed to brake vehicle.

10 Dimmer switch is depressed to raise or lower headlight beam.

TA 092278

2-6 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

1 1 Warning buzzer is located above the

left cowl vent. The unit buzzes when

transmission oil temperature exceeds

325°F (162.7°C) and/or when

airbrake system pressure drops below

60psi. (413.7 kPa).

12 Backrest control adjusts seat backrest.

13 Seat cushion control adjusts height

and angle of seat cushion.

14 Seat horizontal control positions seat

forward or backward.

15 Fuel tank selector switch on models

with dual tanks is turned manually

L (left) or R (right) to select fuel

supply source. Selector is located on

the cab floor on the left side of the

operator's seat.

16 Spring tension control increases seat

spring tension when crank is turned

clockwise.

17 Slotted brackets at each corner permit

front portion of seat to be raised or

lowered.

1 8 Transmission dipstick and oil fill

turns counterclockwise to remove and

check transmission oil level.

Trap door opens to provide access to

dipstick and oil fill.

TA 090115

2-7

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Personnel heater vent cock turns counterclockwise to purge personnel hot water

heater of air.

2 Safety handle holds crew seat in up position for inspection of batteries.

3 Two person crew seat lifts up to provide access to batteries.

4 Clip holds safety handle (2) when crew seat (3) is down.

5 Batteries provide electrical charge to the starter motor and electric current to

headlights, horns, and gages.

6 Latches lock crew seat down for travel.

7 Map compartment stores maps,

manuals, forms, and papers.

8 Front winch drum lock knob locks

drum when winch is not in use.

9 Front winch control is pulled out to

engage winch clutch, pushed in to

disengage winch clutch.

TA 092279

2-8 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

1 0 Hood latch (one on each side of vehicle)

unhooks to release hood.

1 1 Hood handle is used to assist in the

raising and lowering of the hood.

1 2 Hood safe.'y bar is used to pull tilt

hood forward and down. Bar secures

raised hood to bumper while in up

position. Bar is secured by pin (14) to

storage bracket (13) during travel.

1 3 Safety bar storage bracket secures

safety bar to hood.

14 Safety bar pin is attached to safety

bar. Pin secures bar to hood bracket

during travel and secures bar to

bumper bracket during use.

1 5 Bumper bracket secures safety bar to

bumper when hood is in open

position.

16 Oil dipstick is unscrewed and removed

to check oil level.

17 Shutoff cocks are turned

counterclockwise to circulate heated

coolant through vehicle cab heating

system. Both cocks must be opened

before the heater blower motor can

provide heated air. Cocks must be

closed when operating in warm

weather.

18 Radiator drain cock is turned

counterclockwise to drain coolant from

the radiator.

TA 092280

Change 1 2-9

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Power steering oil reservoir dipstick is

attached to reservoir fill cap. Dipstick

is unscrewed and removed to check

power steering oil level.

2 Engine oil filler cap is removed to add

oil.

3 Coolant surge tank cap is removed to

add coolant.

4 Window washer container cap unsnaps to refill washer reservoir.

5 Ether storage cylinder stores ether used for starting during cold weather operations.

6 Fuel tank filler cap is turned

counterclockwise to remove for fuel

servicing.

7 Primary drain cock turns counter

clockwise to drain water from primary

brake system air reservoir.

8 Secondary drain cock turns

counterclockwise to drain water from

secondary brake system air reservoir.

9 Wet tank drain cock turns


brake system wet tank air reservoir.

10 Spring brake drain cock turns


spring brake air reservoir.

U Tool box latch handle turns down to

unlatch and open tool box.

TA 092281

2-10 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

12 Slave receptacle located on right rear

side of cab, is the plug-in point for an

external power source to jump start

the vehicle when batteries have

become discharged.

13 Spare tire boom extends to allow spare tire to be lifted and guided over the side

of the truck. Boom is installed on models M923 through M928. M931, and M932

only. Dump trucks (M929. M930) and vans (M934, M935) employ stationary

chain falls. Wrecker (M936) uses the vehicle crane to lift and lower spare tire.

14 Lock pin secures wing lug to hinged wheel brace for traveling.

15 Hinged wheel brace is removed before wheel removal.

16 Chain fall lifts and lowers spare tire. Chain fall travels along the spare tire boom

on rollers. A stop built into the boom prevents overextending the chain fall rollers

beyond the boom end.

17 Wheel brace holds tire in place once

hinged brace is secured.

18 Spare tire wing lug secures spare tire

to wrecker.

TA 090119

2-11

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Trailer power outlet receptacle provides electric power for trailer when connected

by stored cable to trailer connection.

2 Towing pintle hook opens to attach trailer towing bar.

3 Emergency air coupling is connected by an air coupling hose to the front

emergency coupling of a trailer or vehicle to be towed. This connection permits

the towing vehicle to charge the brake system of a trailer or disabled vehicle with

air.

4 Trailer air valve handles are turned to release compressed air to trailer brake system.

5 Trailer .service air coupling is connected by an air coupling hose to the front

service coupling of a trailer or vehicle to be towed. This connection permits the

operator to engage the brakes of the towed load when engaging the brake pedal

of the towing vehicle.

TA 090120

2-12

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-4. Body Equipment, Controls, and Indicators.

a. Medium Wrecker.

6 Directional control lever controls rotation of rear winch drum. Control is pulled back

to WIND and forward to UNWIND. Center position is neutral.

7 Torque control lever is pulled forward to HIGH for light winch loads and back to

LOW for heavy loads. Lever must be engaged HIGH or LOW before operation of

directional control lever (6).

8 Cable tensioner control valve controls tension on winch cable. Lever is pulled up

to release tension, down to apply tension.

9 Throttle control lever controls winch speed.

10 Boom control lever raises boom when pulled toward operator, lowers boom when

moved away from operator.

1 1 Hoist control lever raises boom hook when pulled toward operator, lowers hook

when moved away from operator.

12 Crowd control lever retracts boom when pulled toward operator, extends boom

when moved away from operator.

13 Swing control lever swings crane assembly right when pulled toward operator,

swings crane assembly left when moved away from operator.

TA 092282

Change 1 2-13

TM 9-2320-272-10


Shipper brace retaining bracket holds

free end of shipper braces when not

in use.

Floodlights each have ON /OFF

switch. Floodlight control switch on

instrument panel must be on before

floodlights operate.

Shipper brace assemblies support

shipper and boom during heavy rear

lifts and cross-country operations.

Frame tube provides storage space for

outriggers when not in use. Outriggers

are pin-locked in storage position.

Outriggers provide stabilization when handling heavy side lifts with crane.

Handles raise and lower outriggers.

7 Boom jacks are extended as required for heavy rear or side lifts.

Boom jack base plates are attached to

boom jacks when in use. and stored in

vehicle when not in use.

Tie bar adds stability to boom jack.

The tie bar is secured by boom jack

pins.

TA 090122

2-14

TM 9-2320-272-10

10 Field chocks anchor vehicle in winch operations.

1 1 Storage space for boom jacks when not in use.

12 Storage space for field chocks when not in use.

1 3 Storage space for tow bar.

14 Dipstick on top of reservoir measures oil level in hydraulic oil reservoir.

TA 090123

2-15

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Filter indicator on front of reservoir tells whether crane oil filter is CLEAN or

NEEDS CLEANING. Filter element must be changed whenever indicator is on

NEEDS CLEANING.

TA 090124

2-16

TM 9-2320-272-10

b. Dump Trucks.

2 Transmission power takeoff control

lever provides power to operate dump

hydraulic hoist and front winch on

M930.

3 Dump body control raises dump body

when in power up (3a) position;

lowers dump body when in power

down (3b) position, l.evcr should be

locked in neutral (3) position when

hoist is not being operated.

4 Lock is spring loaded and locks dump

body control in neutral when hoist is

not in use.

5 Tailgate control lever on dump body unlocks tailgate latches (8) when pulled back;

locks tailgate when pushed forward.

6 Retaining pins secure tailgate upper

hinge pins during standard dump

operations. Pins are removed lor

rocker type-dump operations.

7 Wing harness hooks secure tailgate

wings to side of dump. Pins are

removed to free wings for rocker-type

dump operations.

8 Tailgate latches unlock when tailgate

control lever (5) is pulled back.

Latches lock the tailgate when hand

lever is pushed forward.

TA 092283

Change 1 2-17

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Upper hinge brackets house upper hinger pins by means of retaining pin.

2 Tailgate wings swing to rear for rocker-type dump operations.

3 Tailgate wing brackets house upper hinge pins for rocker-type dump operations.

4 Dump body support braces hold dump body in up position for added safety during

maintenance or cleaning of dump body underside.

5 Brackets hold dump body support braces when braces are not being used.

2-18

TM 9-2320-272-10

'. Cargo Trucks.

8 Reservoir cap is wrench tight and provides access to oil dipstick.

TA 090127

2-19

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Tractor Trucks.


1 Electrical cable and connector is

connected to the semitrailer electrical

receptacle to provide electric power to

semitrailer.

2 Emergency airbrake hose line and

coupling is connected to the

emergency airbrake coupling on the

semitrailer. Semitrailer emergency

brake system is activated when the

"regular" air system fails.

Service airbrake hose line and

coupling connects to the service air

receptacle on the semitrailer.

Airbrake hose coupling shutoff cocks

should be in the down (open) position

at all times during normal operation

of tractor truck.

5 Loc king plunger lever is pulled up and out to unlock fifth wheel coupling jaws.

6 Coupling jaws lock the semitrailer kingpin into the tractor fifth wheel.

TA 090128

2-20

TM 9-2320-272-10

7 Expanded van side is secured to hinged roof (8) by swivel hooks (14) and toggle

clamps (15).

8 Hinged roof panel is supported by swivel hooks (14) and toggle clamps (15).

9 Endpanel is hinged to van side (7) and secured to corner post (II) by sliding bolt ( 18).

10 Balance mechanism evenly controls lowering and raisinu of hinged floor ( 19) and roof

(8).

I I Corner post provides brace for expanded sides.

12 Heaters are in front of van. Left heater in both van models is fuel powered. Right

heater in M934 van is fuel powered. Right heater in M935 is electrically powered.

13 Bonnet door control handle is pushed forward to open bonnet door before

operating air conditioning. Handle is pulled back to close bonnet door alter air

conditioning unit has been shut off.

14 Swivel hooks are swung sideways to support hinged roof panel when van isexpanded.

15 Toggle clamp locks with swivel hook (14) to secure hinged roof panel to van side.

16 Heat registers are in use when van heaters (12) are operating. Registers must be

closed when van heaters (12) are not in use.

17 Latch on van corner post holds sliding bolt in correct position.

18 Sliding holt alines end panel (9) with van corner post (1I).

19 Floor is hinged for up and down movement.

TA 090129

2-21

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Power input receptacle is connected by cable to outside power source to provide

electric power for air conditioner.

2 Circuit breaker must be in ON position before use of air conditioner controls.

3 Compressor circuit breaker shuts air conditioner off automatically if electrical or

other trouble develops in conditioner. Circuit breaker must be manually reset to

ON position after trouble has been corrected.

4 Air conditioner controls air circulation. COOL position circulates cool air. VENT

position circulates outside air into the van body.

5 Fan speed control increases air circulation speed in HIGH position and decreases

air circulation speed in LOW position.

6 Temperature selector lever provides cooler temperatures when in COOLER

position. In WARMER position, air conditioner maintains 68°F to 72°F

(20°C to 22°C) temperatures. Air conditioner shuts off when temperature selector

knob is in OFF position.

7 Heater sw itch circulates heated air in HEATER position and unheated outside air

in FAN position. Heater stops in OFF position.

8 White indicator light glows when heater is working properly.

9 Red indicator light glows when heater stops because of fuel or ignition trouble.

10 Reset button is pushed to restart heater when fuel or ignition trouble has been

corrected.

1 1 Handle controls mix of outside and inside air when heater is operating.

TA 090130

2-22

TM 9-2320-272-10

12 Circuit breaker box controls electric power received from outside source.

NOTE

An instruction plate near the breaker box lists circuits controlled by

each switch.

13 Air conditioner vents are opened to allow cool air to circulate.

14 Heater thermostat regulates heaters.

15 Hydraulic lift gate auxiliary sw itch (M935 only) raises and lowers hydraulic lift gate

when external power is in use.

16 Power converter sw itch changes alternating electric current from outside source to

direct current used in van electrical equipment.

17 Blackout light switch is turned on for blackout operations.

18 Emergency light sw itch is turned on when normal service lights fail.

19 Fire extinguishers are mounted on van front and rear walls.

20 Telephone jack connects van telephone to outside lines.

21 Van body expanding and retracting wrench is used to expand and retract van body.

22 Side panel lock wrench is used to lock outer edges of van roof, corner posts and end

panels when van is expanded.

23 Plate contains instructions for operation of van.

24 Side doors are used by personnel when van is expanded.

TA 090131

2-23

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Window regulator opens window

when turned clockwise, closes window

when turned counterclockwise.

2 Eye-holt unscrews counterclockwise to

free stabilizer (3) from travel position.

3 Stabilizer located directly beneath

each van corner post telescopes down

to ground level to stabilize van before

expanding.

4 Eye pin inserts into holes in stabilizer (3)

to hold telescoped parts in place.

5 Bonnet door must be opened before air

conditioner is operated.

6 Rod opens bonnet door when bonnet

door control handle inside van is

8 Side lockrods are attached to lock handles (18) when van is expanded.

9 Hydraulic lift gate on M935 model has a capacity of 3.000 lbs (1362 kg.).

TA 090132

2-24

331060VI

|3AKJJJO|)#)SdOJ>(0O|

nuitfngueenq/vve|dunq>po|sarneasuij9|

emaJfotdeisddeunpxe

reneesotddeunpxesiubaueqw)8)

sdor>po|deis3I?bi?u3saipuDifyw/XI

|3AaJJ

JOJ|33JleqK3JOMOpSJ3AOJ)SDM4I7J/_[

3SnUI3JnSJdedi?|U3l|AvSJOddiq

e3w?uesidy.w.iqiiuuunoiurjppo']9|

SJOOdUaAOSOpOJUAU)ddut?

unpootpnedurntsid|piwijy.)«/./ooc/si

rofdoptuprrododunpxosiul!auoq.wsiuouopiuo.i.is.n|t>po|ot

..)Sjw>|.io|.ipeurntsiq.iu.tr/Wuoipimi.ujouoisunpxe.uofeqroojfperiuiqdunfoor

potfuiqsodis.i|qisui?pxo>po|un01osi.vv>popjoiuno.ipndoiumsii|.iujrmy.w/pI

•tcnntfqseso|edunsenpo./<?.w>//ortuo.)XinsopIHuiuado£\

eib3tfi|sesinjdunser,wo|./,>.i,>/|oriuo.iXuiit).v<Jjdl8uuaM(r]£|

|OabrtSuund

rsdedn|fodueiuottoqe.in.Tostcnnt|i|foedirsdeunotdeqnnttnswmppunsi|oqM'g||

pdoujSt9IAluotcn3t.|i|uodreotsernsrappir]0|

sz-z

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Phone jack receptacle receives outside communication lines.

2 Door handle \& turned counterclockwise to open and clockwise to close rear van door.

3 Ladder clamps in M934 van secure lower end of ladders for travel.

4 Pow er entrance receptacle receives power cable (5) to provide electric power to van

from outside source.

5 Power cable connects van to outside power source.

6 Power cable reel stores power cable (5) for travel.

7 Stabilizers steady van when expanded.

8 Ground spike provides ground when external electric power is used.

9 Storage box for ground spike, tools, and cable reel canvas cover.

TA 090134

2-26

TM 9-2320-272-10

10 Locking plungers (located beneath left and right rear doors) are pushed downward

to release ratchets (12) and pawls (13) before expanding or retracting sides.

Plungers are pulled upward to lock van sides in expanded or retracted position.

1 1 Van body expanding and retracting wrench (stowed in bracket on inner part of

rear door) fits over ratchets ( 12). Wrench is turned counterclockwise to expand

left van side, clockwise to expand right van side.

12 Ratchet is turned by expanding and retracting wrench (1 I) to expand and retract

van sides.

13 Pawl attached to locking plunger (10) locks ratchet (12). Pawl releases ratchet

when locking plunger (10) is pushed downward.

TA 090135

2-27

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-5. Special Kits, Controls, and Indicators.

a. A-Frame Kit can he installed on all vehicles with a front winch lot loading and

unloading cargo trucks. A-frame load limit is 3.000 pounds (1.362 kilograms).


1 Apex spreader positions A-frame and supports sheave assemhly.

2 Tube and leg assemblies arc attached to lifting shackle brackets and apex spreader

to form an A-frame for lifting.

3 Sheave assembly supports front winch cable in lifting position.

4 Cable assembly is attached to A-frame and inverted pintle hook to maintain A-frame

in position at a 60° angle.

5 Plate assembly protects cable assembly and truck bed from wear and distortion.

b. Airbrake Control Kit is installed on vehicles towing trailers equipped with airbrakes.

NOTE

Air brake kit is for use on all

models except tractors and

wreckers (M931. M932. and

M936).

6 Airbrake hand control lever applies

brakes on towed vehicle when pulled

down. Lever releases brakes when

pulled up.

TA 090136

2-28

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Arctic Winterization Kit is installed on vehicles operating in temperatures of

-25°F(-32°C) or lower.

9 Hardtop closure replaces canvas cover for arctic temperature operations.

NOTE

Hardtop closure is also available as a separate kit.

10 Quilted engine compartment cover is attached to the brush guard, hood, and side

panels to maintain normal operating temperatures under arctic temperature

conditions.

1 1 Aperture flap is opened or closed to control the amount of air passing through

the radiator.

Change 1 2-29

TM 9-2320-272-10


1 Defroster control handle is pulled all the way out for maximum defroster

operation, pushed in for maximum heater operation, and placed halfway out for

combination heater/defroster operation.

2 Heat vent handle is pulled all the way out for maximum airflow, pushed in to decrease

or shut off the air.

3 Hi-lo switch controls the personnel heater blower speed.

4 Red indicator light is on when personnel heater is operating.

5 Start-off-run switch is positioned down to start the personnel heater, up to run

the heater, once it has been started, and in the center to stop the heater.

6 Hi-lo switch controls the rate of fuel burning and blower speed in the engine heater.

7 Red indicator light is on when the engine heater is operating.

8 Start-off-run switch is positioned down to start the engine heater, up to run the

heater and in the center to stop the heater.

TA 090138

2-30

TM 9-2320-272-10

9 Fuel burning personnel heater is located under hood on right side of engine. I

10 Inlet coolant shutoff cock is opened to allow coolant from surge tank to pass

down to engine coolant heater.

1 1 Outlet coolant shutoff cock is opened to allow heated engine coolant to enter

engine.

12 Coolant shutoff cock near engine coolant heater in vehicle tool box is opened to

allow coolant to enter fuel burning engine coolant heater.

13 Petcock is opened to allow fuel to enter engine coolant heater.

14 Fuel burning engine coolant heater is installed in the left corner of vehicle tool box.

15 Electric fuel pump installed near air cleaner assembly on left side of vehicle cab is

battery powered to provide fuel for engine coolant heater and personnel heater.

16 Fuel petcock must be open to allow fuel to be pumped to engine coolant heater

and fuel burning personnel heater.

TA 092285

Change 1 2-31

TM 9-2320-272-10

e. Deep Water Fording Kit permits vehicles to cross through water up to 78 in.

(198.1cm).


1 Fording control handle is pulled out on entering water and pushed in on leaving water.

2 Plate contains fording control handle instructions.

3 Storage boss stores flywheel housing

drain plug during normal operations.

4 Flywheel housing drain plug is

removed from storage hoss and

installed in flywheel drain port (5) to

prevent water from entering flywheel

housing.

5 Flyw heel housing drain port is

plugged during fording operation;

open during normal operation.

i

TA 090140

2-32

TM 9-2320-272-10

/ Troopseat and Paulin Kit is installed for troop operations.

6 End curtains protect front and rear ends of cargo compartment.

7 Lashing rope secures end curtain to crossbow.

8 Endflap opens and closes for ventilation.

9 Troopseats on each side can be secured up for cargo, or down for seating, as required.

10 Paulin protects top and sides of cargo body.

1 1 Crossbows support top of paulin.

12 Straps secure paulin top to crossbows when sides are rolled up.

13 Stave and corner assemblies support crossbows.

14 Lashing hooks secure side of paulin to truck bed.

15 Safety strap at tailgate protects passengers against falling from vehicle.

TA 092286

Change 1 2-33

TM 9-2320-272-10

g. Machine Gun Mount Kit can be installed on all cargo, tractor, and wrecker trucks. Kit

is designed for use with M2 or M60 machine guns.


1 Gun swings full circle around horizontal

track of moun*.

2 Bracket permits up/ down swivel

h. Rifle Mount Kit secures M16 rifles to inside of cab for travel.

3 Catch assembly holds weapon safely

in place for travel. Assembly is pulled

out and up to free rifle when needed.

TA 090142

2-34

TM 9-2320-272-10

Section II. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS

AND SERVICES

2-6. General. | A permanent reeord of the services, repairs, and modifications made

to these vehicles must be recorded. Sec TM 38-750 for a list of the forms and records

required.

2-7. Cleaning Instructions and Precautions. | Cleaning is an after-operation

service performed by operator crew to keep the vehicle in a state of readiness. Facilities

and material available to operators for vehicle cleaning can vary greatly in differing

operating conditions. However, vehicles must be maintained in as clean a condition as

available cleaning equipment, materials, and tactical situations permit.

a. General Cleaning Precautions.

(1) All cleaning procedures must be accomplished in well-venitlated areas.

(2 ) Protective gloves, clothing, and or respiratory equipment must be worn whenever

caustic, toxic, or flammable cleaning solutions are used.

(3) Diesel fuel or gasoline must never be used for cleaning.

(4) A fire extinguisher must be available and ready during all cleaning operations

involv ing solvents.

b. Special Cautions.

(1) Do not allow cleaning compounds to come into contact with rubber, leather,

vinyl, or canvas materials.

(2) Do not allow corrosion-removing cleaning compounds to contact painted

surfaces.

(3) Do not use pressure steam or air in cleaning truck cab interiors or van body

interiors.

(4 ) Mildew must be removed with a bristle brush before canvas paulin can be properly

cleaned and aired.

;

(5 ) The radiator is always cleaned f irst I torn behind in order to blow debris, insects, or

other obstructions out and away from the radiator core, l ow pressure water, air,

or steam can be used in cleaning radiator core of obstructions.

c. Cleaning Materials. Detailed descriptions of specific cleaning compounds, cleaning

solvents, drycleaning solutions, and corrosion-removing compounds are found in TM 9-247.

d. General Guidelines. Table 2-1 provides a general guideline to cleaning materials

used in removing contaminants from various vehicle surfaces.

TA 090143

2-35

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-1 . General Cleaning Instructions

Cleaning Materials Used to Remove

Surface Oil/Grease Salt /Mud/Dust/Debris Surface Rust/Corrosion

Body Grease-elea ning

compound: cold,

running water: rags.

High pressure water steam;

soapy, warm water; soft

brush; damp and dry rags.

Corrosion-removing com

pound; bristle brush; dry rags:

lubricating oil.*

Cab Interior

(Metals)

Grease-cleaning

compound: damp

and dry rags.

Damp and dry rags. Corrosion-removing com

pound: bristle brush: dry rags,

lubricating oil.*

Cab Interior

(Glass)

Issued glass cleaning

solution; clean, dry

rags.

Issued solution: clean, dry rag. Not applicable.

Cab 1 ntcrior

(Material)

Saddle soap; warm

water, soft brush,

and dry rags.

Soft brush: soapy, warm

water; damp and dry rags.

Not applicable.

Frame Grease-cleaning

compound rinsed

with cold, running

water: rags.

High pressure water steam:

soapy, warm water, wire

brush: clamp and dry rags.

Corrosion-removing com

pound: wire brush, dry rags,

lubricating oil.*

Engine

Transmission

M ixed solution

l-part grease-

cleaning compound.

4-parts dry cleaning

so Kent: cold,

running water: rags.


soapy, warm water: soft

wire brush: damp and dry

rags.

Bristle brush; warm, soapy

water; dry rags.

Glass Issued glass cleaning

solution: clean,

dry rags.

Issued glass cleaning

solution: clean, dry rags.

Not applicable.

Radiator Not applicable. Low pressure water steam

air: soapy, warm water: damp

and dry rags.

Not applicable.

Rubber

Insulation

Saddle soap: damp

and dry rags.

Saddle soap: damp and

dry rags.

Not applicable.

Tires Soapy water: steam:

bristle brush.


bristle brush.

Not applicable.

Wire Rope Cleaning com

pound; wire brush.

Wire brush. Wire brush: lubricating oil.*

Wood Detergent: warm

water: damp and

dry rags.

l ow pressure water: soapy,

warm water; damp and dry

rags.

Not applicable.

•After cleaning, apply light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to prevent continued

rust.

TA 090144

2-36

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-8. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)

a. Designated Intervals.

NOTE

Observe eautions and warnings.

(1) BEFORE checks and services (B) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be

performed prior to placing vehicle, or its components, in operation.

(2) DURING checks and services (D) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE will be

performed while the vehicle and or its components systems are in operation.

(3) AFTER checks and services (A) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are

performed upon completion of mission.

(4) WEEKLY checks and services (W) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are

performed once every seven days.

(5) MONTHLY checks and services (M) of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are

performed once every 30 days.

b. Procedures.

(1) Troubleshoot malfunctions. Refer to table 3-1. Or. notify supervisor.

(2) Use form DA 2404 and report non-repairable item(s) to organizational

maintenance at once.

(3) Tools included with vehicle are to be used when making PREVENTIVE

MAINTENANCE checks and services. Also, wiping cloths are sometimes needed to

remove dirt or grease.

c. Troublespots.

NOTE

Dirt, grease, oil. ;ind debris may cover up ;i serious problem. Clean as you

check. Following precautions printed on container, use drv cleaning solvent

(SD-2) )item 47. appendix D) on all metal surfaces. On rubber or plastic-

material, use soap and water.

(1) Check all bolts, nuts, and screws. It loose, bent, broken, or missing, either

tighten or report conditions to organizational maintenance.

(2) Look for loose or chipped paint, and rust or gaps at welds. II a bad weld is

found, report situation to organizational maintenance.

(3) Inspect electrical wires and connectors for cracked or broken insulation. Also

look for bare wires, and loose or broken connections, l ighten loose connections.

Report other problems to organizational maintenance.

TA 090145

2-37

9M060VI

eeumreimnui|auoiinziui?droo\rorosmepnsrnovoiApteidemmi

edrtopreeqtsnius)\v.d\\\\ssiqjSJlAld0LHu!deJinbaisus|eae|

dinyjjwqes.)|a3|11ro|nsepqqwSmiarepoenq/v\ROsiAdJdllSHflOA

AdllON'lanODNlN3HAAUi.nsXsiuei(heifoUiepaaedinuredisuoe

•esrnoefotsniuno\ei?b>ji?e|||ro\ssfipqtiweiqi?/\vo||HsiuoitnerpQ

NOiinvo

depepsuide>peqe

tfuieqiueiieqtluorf||a|inqispodrUIorJotqtfnoentnretfe3b>jbe']7//vvo/j\j

depepsuide>peqetfiqeqluetiluorfpud

01spodresm;eotqrinouetoutnqspodriurof0}qtfnouetnre3ar?a>p;eq7/vvu/j(/

spo.ip

lu.io|01qnnom\kmHtouuoiti!JO|oesipjoss.uuowvqpotiMipm.LiiîM17/;

:odinribsn3ui/*vo||ofoqios|]11irodor\nuoofopj0u.ô.iqf|ij

UOtqiill\>SOO|SIJOJ.UUUOOJOt?UIJJl|I!IIOi?B)|BO|SOJOU.q)OS|l!LI11?JSyM.il!>|SOJirOidm

suoueeuuoorosi?ujui|-sio5|sijii's|i?esdunori:ss.uu\\\paBesjeenia>|se9pueno6Z

srteptfuissiiuouqtiaadun.eeiqpiqdireqtui,/qqiuessa

ubskuoitb||btsuiroftenuopiuoeqene>peqj);yHi)MOigroX|ifiiMssyi.wrjoja

l~phri;p>retpnqj

.05>Z.8-tIA1.L°lJ3.PR.«->|qa|iaAaiinroAdnretousi?detropereq\[mtueiupinbe

'uoissiUJdequesodeqtuuofrepote|qntousiepiqeAb\\uoiiipuojX|wjy10^p

('s^BOIUOUOIJBIUJOJUIJOJfrlaJl?p.w^)ihgtireasSujuy

dunspmsprense>|i?[ajs>p?e|dui?*3§aUida'rbemrofseui|dinydunsesoq>poqj)p)

Qi-ZLlOlZl-bWl

8Z-Z

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-2. Operatorj Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly

INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED EQUIPMENT IS

ITEM

NO.B D A W M

PROCEDURE: Check for and

have repaired, filled, or

adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

NOTE

Perform Weekly (W) as well

as Before (B) PMCS' if:

a. You are the assigned operator but have not

operated vehicle since the last weekly.

b. You are operating the vehicle for the first

time.

1 EXTERIOR OF VEHICLE

MAKE THE FOLLOWING

WALK-AROUND CHECKS:

• a. Visually check for obvious damage to body

and cab that would impair operation.

• b. Check tires for cuts, gouges, or cracks.

Remove all penetrating objects.

Tires have cuts, gouges,

or cracks which would

result in tire failure

during operation. One or

more tires missing or flat

and no spare available.

• c.

d.

Look under vehicle for evidence of fluid

leakage (fuel, oil, and coolant).

Any fuel leakage.

Class III leakage of oil

or coolant is evident.

Check condition of:

•

•

(1) Windshield and windows

(2) Windshield wiper arms and blades

• (3) Mirrors

•

•

(4) All locking and fastening devices

(5) Spare tire mounting

•

•

(6) Check operation of doors and

windows.

(7) Check operation of headlights,

tail lights, and turn signals.

TA 092287

Change 1 2-39

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-2. Operator/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)


B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M

ITEM TO BE INSPECTED



adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

TIRES

a. Gage tires for correct air pressure using

tire inflation gage and hose assembly.

Adjust as necessary.

PRESSURE RATING (approximate)

FRONT REAR

VEHICLE

(TIRE SIZE)

Standard

(psi)

H CC

Metric

(kPa)

H CC

Standard

(psi)

H CC

Metric

(kPa)

H CC

M923,M924,M925,M926,

M927,M928,M929,M930,

M931,M932,M934,M935

(11:00x20) 90 60 551 413 50 30 344 206

M936 (11:00 x 20) 70 60 482 413 70 60 482 413

All Models: Mud, Sand

and Snow 25 25 172 172 25 25 172 172

H: Highway

CC: Cross Country

Check tire tread (I) depth. Tread (1)

should not be less than i/s-inch thick.

On tires with wear bars, tread (1) should

not be worn beyond level of wear bar.

c. Ensure all wheel stud nuts are tight using

wheel stud nut wrench and handle.

Equipment is not ready

if tread is less than

i/g-inch thick or worn

beyond level of wear

bar.

TA 092288

2-40 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

BDAWM




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

EXHAUST SYSTEM

WARNING

Do not touch hot exhaust

pipes with bare hands.

Severe burns will result.

NOTE

If exhaust pipes, muffler,

or manifold leak or are rusted

through, report deficiency

to organizational maintenance.

Listen for exhaust pipes (2),

muffler (4), and manifold

(3) leaks and inspect for

rusted-through condition. I

TA 092289

Change 1 2-41

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)



ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

FUEL FILTER

CAUTION

If one quart or more of fuel

must be drained from fuel filter (1)

before fuel is clear, fuel

tanks and fueling source must

be inspected carefully. Report fuel

contamination to organizational

maintenance.

Open petcock (2) and drain into a container.

If there are large amounts of water and

impurities, allow fuel to drain until fuel is

clear, and check fuel tank(s) for contamination.

Close petcock.

TA 092290

2-42 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

FUEL SYSTEM

WARNING

Do not perform fuel system

checks or inspection while

smoking or near fire, flames,

or sparks. Fuel could ignite,

causing damage to vehicle,

severe injury, or death.

a. Inspect fuel tank(s) (3) for leaks

and broken supports.

Check fuel lines and hoses for leakage

and damage. Make sure all connec

tions are secure.

Any fuel leakage evident

Fuel tank(s), lines, and

support straps are

damaged.

II1

ll

J.*

[

li U Li

TA 092291

Change 1 2-43

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

AIR RESERVOIR DRAINCOCKS

a. Check security of mounting of drain-

cocks to tool box mounting bracket.

b. Open draincocks and drain moisture

from:

(1). Primary airbrake system air reservoir

(2) Secondary airbrake system air

reservoir

(3) Airbrake system wet tank reservoir

(4) Spring brake air reservoir

NOTE

Make sure draincocks are

closed tight before next

operation of the vehicle.

TA 092292

2-44 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10



B-Bafore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly

I l I

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

BATTERIES

WARNING

Don't smoke, have open flames,

or make sparks around the

batteries, especially if the caps

are off. They can explode

and cause injury.

NOTE

Batteries are located under crew

seat in cab. Unlatch, raise, and

secure crew seat (5) with retaining

bar to gain access to battery

compartment (6).

a. Check fluid level.

TA 092293

Change 1 2-45

TM 9-2320-272-10



B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthry

INTERVALITEM TO BE INSPECTED

EQUIPMENT IS

ITEMB D A W M



adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:NO.

NOTE

If fluid level is low, or is

boiling, notify organizational

maintenance.

• b. Visually inspect batteries for cracked or

leaking casing and broken or burnt

terminal posts.

• c. Visually inspect battery compartment

for corrosion.

UNDERBODY

8 POWER STEERING ASSIST CYLINDER

• a. Inspect power steering assist cylinder (1)

for damage and leaks.

Cuts, breaks, abra

sions or Class III

leaks.

9

•

•

b. Check fluid lines for defects and leaks.

FRAME

Cuts, breaks, abra

sions, or Class III

leaks.

Visually inspect frame side rails, crossmembers.

and underbody supports for loose or broken

bolts, cracks, breaks, broken welds, and rusted-

through conditions.

10 DIFFERENTIALS

• Visually inspect front and rear differentials for

oil leaks.

TA 092294

2-46 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

11

12

TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER

a. Check all hose connections within reach

on transmission for looseness. Tighten

loose connections. Inspect connections

for damage.

b. Check all hose connections within reach

on transfer for looseness. Tighten loose

connections. Inspect connections for

damage.

c. Visually check transmission and transfer

for damage and leakage.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT SIDE

Hi

Evidence of damage

or Class III leaks.

SURGE TANK

a. Check coolant level in surge tank (2).

Tank should be at a minimum 3/4 full

before operation. Fill if necessary.

h Check all hoses (3) for deterioration

and/ or leakage. Tighten loose, leaking

hose connections.

Cuts, breaks, abra

sions, or Class 111

leaks.

TA 092295

Change 1 2-47

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

13 ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CAUTION

Withdraw dipstick (1) slowly. A

false reading can result if dipstick is

withdrawn too quickly.

NOTE

Engine oil level is checked with

engine stopped and with dipstick (I)

removed, wiped clean, and slowly

reinserted for a reading.

Pull out dipstick and check for proper oil level.

Level should be between L (low) and H (high)

marks. Add oil as necessary.

CAUTION

Do not overfill.

TA 092296

2-48 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

14 PULLEY BELTS

15

Check for cracking, fraying, and breaks

on alternator drive belt (4), fan belts (2),

and power steering pump drive belts (3).

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

LEFT SIDE

POWER STEERING PUMP

a. Check pump (5) for leakage.

b. Visually inspect pump hoses (6)

for deterioration and leaks.

Belts are cracked,

frayed, broken, or

missing.

Evidence of damage or

Class III leaks.

Cuts, breaks, abra

sions, or Class III

leaks. I

TA 092297

Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10



B-Bsfore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

16 WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

17

18

Check fluid level in reservoir (1). If less

than half full, fill with washer fluid.

ALCOHOL EVAPORATOR

Check fluid level. Fill with alcohol if

bottle (2) is less than 2/ 3 full.

INTERIOR OF VEHICLE

ENGINE OPERATION

a. Start engine. Check idle speed and

instruments (see item 19).

b. Listen for unusual noises or vibrations,

especially during acceleration.

Bottle damaged; empty

(cold weather opera

tions only).

Engine inoperative.

Unusual noises or

vibrations.

TA 092298

Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

19 INSTRUMENTS

With transmission in neutral and engine

at idle, check the following instrument

readings:

a. Air cleaner indicator (3).

b. Tachometer (4).

c. Primary air pressure gage (6).

d. Battery indicator gage (7) needle.

e. Secondary air pressure gage (8).

/ Engine oil pressure gage (10).

g. Fuel gage (1 1) indicates fuel.

h. Engine coolant temperature gage

(5).

i. Transmission oil temperature gage

(9)

Air cleaner indicator

stays in red.

Tachometer (4) reads

iless than 450 rpm or

more than 700 rpm.

Primary air pressure

gage (6) reads less than

60 psi (413 kPa).

Battery indicator needle

in red area.

Secondary air pressure

gage (8) reads less than

60 psi (413 kPa).

Engine oil pressure

reads less than 5 psi

(34 kPa).

Temperature gage (5)

reads greater than

225°F (107°C).

Oil temperature exceeds

325° F (163°C).

TA 092299

Change 1 2-51

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

20 TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL

NOTE

Start engine, engage vehicle

brakes and move trans

mission control lever through

all forward gears and reverse

before checking oil level in

neutral.

CAUTION

Withdraw transmission dipstick (4)

slowly. Removing dipstick (4)

too quickly creates a vacuum

within the filler tube which

may result in a false oil level

reading.

TA 092300

2-52 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10





ITEM

NO.B D A W M



adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

CAUTION

Do not permit dirt, dust or grit

to enter transmission filler tube.

Serious internal transmission

damage may result if trans

mission is contaminated.

• After thoroughly cleaning access door (1),

dipstick handle (2), and end of filler tube, check

for proper oil level with transmission in neutral

and engine at idle. If transmission oil tempera

ture gage indicates 180°F (82° C) or below, level

on dipstick (4) should show between marks

designated for normal run (3).

Add transmission oil as necessary. Refer to

LO 9-2320-272-12.

CAUTION

Do not overfill transmission.

21 BRAKE SYSTEM

a. With the air system charged fully

(120 psi), engine off, and parking

brake set, walk around vehicle and:

•

•

(1) Listen for leaks in the air system

air reservoir, lines and hoses.

Any reservoirs or lines

and hoses are leaking.

(2) Visually check brake chamber and

air reservoirs for obvious damage.

Visually check hoses and lines

for cracks, chaffing, etc.

• b. Operate service brakes to determine

stopping ability. Check for any pulling,

grabbing, or other abnormal operation.

Service brakes do not

operate properly.

• c. Determine parking brake ability to hold

vehicle by first engaging hand brake,

then engage transmission. Vehicle

should not move.

TA 4)92301

Change 1 2-53

TM 9-2320-272-10




I i i

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

BDAWM




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

22

23

STEERING SYSTEM

CAUTION

Do not overfill power steering

reservoir.

When engine temperature gage reaches

normal operating temperature 165°F to

195°F (74° C to 90.5° C), stop engine, open

hood and check power steering reservoir

(1) with dipstick in filler cap. If fluid

is below full mark, add as necessary.

Check vehicle steering for unusual

freeplay, binding, wander or shimmy.

TRANSMISSION

Shift transmission in all ranges observing

any unusual stiffness or binding of shifting

linkage.

Loose or binding steering

action or steering wheel

difficult to turn.

Steering inoperative.

jTransmission is inopera

tive.

TA 092302

2-54 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

24

25

26

27

TRANSFER

CAUTION

Do not exceed the maximum road

speeds permitted in HIGH or

LOW transfer ranges. Do not use

reverse gear with transfer in LOW

range. The maximum speed /gear

ranges are:

Transfer is inoperative.

Transmission Transfer Case

HIGH

mph km

LOW

mph km

"1-5" (Drive) 52 84 22 35

"1-4" (Fourth) 43 69 17 27

"1-3" (Third) 33 53 13 21

"1-2" (Second) 25 40 10 16

"1" (First) 12 19 5 8

"R" (Reverse) 5 8 — —

Check shifting operation for unusual noises,

stiffness, or jumping out of gear.

HORNS

Check for operation if tactical situation permits.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE

W W Icq J I O I

Put front wheel drive lock-in switch (3) to IN

position. Make sure front wheel drive

engagement light (2) is on.

FRONT AND REAR DRIVE AXLES AND

PROPELLER SHAFTS

Listen for unusual noises or vibrations.

Vibrations, clicking, or clunking noise indicates

worn U-joints or damaged propeller shafts.

Unusual noises or

vibrations are

evident.

TA 092303

Change 1 2-55

TM 9-2320-272-10





ITEM

NO.B D A W M



adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

SPECIAL BODY EQUIPMENT

28 FRONT WINCH

•

(BEFORE OPERATING WINCH)

(M925,M926,M928,M930,M932,M936)

a. Check hydraulic tank oil level by using

crescent wrench to loosen and remove

filler cap, and pull out dipstick. Oil level

should be above fourth groove from

bottom of dipstick (1). If low, fill to

top notch. After check, make sure filler

cap is wrench-tight.

■

NOTE

See item (41) procedure (a) for

method of checking hydraulic oil

level for M936 vehicle.

• b. Visually inspect winch hoses and lines for

deterioration and leakage.

Class III leaks evident.

• c. Check for secure connections.

29

•

•

FRONT WINCH OPERATION

a. Check all winch controls for proper

operation. No control response.

b. Check cable for kinks, frays, and breaks. Cable is kinked,

frayed, broken or

missing.

TA 092304

2-56 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10





ITEMB D A W M


'have repaired, filled, or

adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:NO.

CARGO TRUCKS

(M923,M924,M925,M926,M927,M928)

30 BODY SIDES

• a. Check cargo body sides for damage,

broken welds, and rusted-through

conditions.

•

•

b. Check cargo body side racks for

cracks and breaks.

c. Make sure troop seat retainers are

present and secure.

31 TAILGATE

•

•

a. Inspect tailgate for damage, security,

and ease of movement.

b. Inspect retaining pins for damage.

DUMP TRUCKS

(M929.M930)

32 DUMP BODY

• Inspect dump body and cab protector for dents,

cracks, broken welds, loose or broken bolts, and

rusted-through conditions. Make sure all bolts

securing cab protector to dump body are tight.

33 TAILGATE

•

•

a. Inspect tailgate for damage, security, and

ease of movement.

b. Check condition and security of:

(1) Tailgate chains

(2) Latches, brackets, and retaining pins.

(3) Tailgate wings and harness hooks.

TA 092305

Change 1 2-57

TM 9-2320-272-10




I I i

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

34

35

TAILGATE CONTROL LINKAGE

Check for proper operation of tailgate control

linkage by:

a. Pulling tailgate control rod hand lever (1)

forward and down to unlock tailgate

latches.

b. Pushing lever (1) up and back to lock

tailgate.

HYDRAULIC TANK OIL LEVEL

a. Check hydraulic tank (6) oil level

by using crescent wrench to loosen

and remove filler cap. and pull out

dipstick. Oil level should be above

fourth groove from bottom of dipstick

(2). If low, fill to top notch.

After check, make sure filler cap is

wrench-tight.

b. Check tank for damage and leakage. Evidence of Class III

leaks.

TA 093306

2-58 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10



B-Bfifore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly

I 1 I

ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

36 HYDRAULIC HOIST

WARNING

Stay clear of dump body

and cab protector at all

times during loading and

unloading operations. The

dump body can unexpectedly

raise when overloaded or

when a heavy load is

dropped into the dump

body. This can result in

serious injury.

a. Check PTO (3), drive shaft (4).

hydraulic pump (5). and control valve (8)

for damage, leakage, and security of

mounting.

b. Inspect cylinders (7) for damage, leakage,

and security of mounting to subframe.

c. Inspect all hydraulic lines and hoses for

signs of deterioration and leakage.

d. Operate dump hoist through raising,

holding, and lowering positions to check

performance. Inspect pivot points for

binding.


Evidence of Class III

leaks.


leaks. Dump hoist

inoperative.

Change 1

TA 092307

2-58.1 (2-58.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-272-10




ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

37 FIFTH WHEEL

(M93I.M932)

a. Check fifth wheel (9) for loose or missing

capscrews securing it to vehicle side rails. I

TA 092308

Change 1 2-59

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-2. OperatorI Crew Preventive Maintenance Cheeks and Services (Cont'd)



ITEM

NO.

INTERVAL

B D A W M




adjusted as needed

EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

38

b. Inspect fifth wheel and approach plates

for bends and damage.

c. Couple and uncouple tractor to determine

if fifth wheel works properly.

TRAILER CONNECTING ACCESSORIES

(M931,M932)

Check trailer supply valve (1) for proper

operation by pushing in valve to supply

air to brake system of towed trailer or

semitrailer.

b. Inspect electrical cable and connector (2)

for cracks, breaks, and other damage.

c. Inspect emergency airbrake hose line (3),

service airbrake hose line (4), and

couplings for damage, deterioration, and

leakage.

Faulty coupling or

uncoupling action.

Valve does not supply

air to brake system

of towed trailer or

semitrailer.

Cable is broken.

Hoses or couplings are

damaged or leaking.

TA 092309

2-60 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10



B- Before operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M- Monthly


NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

ITEM

NO.



adjusted as needed

B D A W M

39 BRAKE LOCK SWITCH

(M936)

•

•

Check brake lock switch (5) for proper operation.

40

41

FLOODLIGHTS AND

WRECKER WARNING LIGHT

(M936)

Inspect floodlights and amber warning light

for operation.

WRECKER CRANE

(M936)

a. Check hydraulic oil level with dipstick in

filler cap (6). Oil level should be at

"FULL" mark. If low, add as necessary but

do not overfill.

TA 092310

Change 1 2-61

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 2-2. Operator-/ Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)




NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

ITEM PROCEDURE: Check for and


adjusted as needed

B D A W MNO.

b. Check for condition of:

(1) Shipper brace assemblies

(2) Boom jacks, base plates, and tie bar

(3) Retaining pins and brackets

(4) Cable hook

(5) Outriggers and foot pads. Outriggers or foot pads

are missing or damaged.

WARNING

Always lower outriggers before

operating the crane.

Q jfT! \\\h \ T

1 \ / II i! ! ^-Eo^Pf

i / v hi. i Pi

ijii U

\*^

© ©

_ % 9 I

• c. Check PTO (1), drive shaft (2), Evidence of Class III

leaks.hydraulic pump (3), and control valve (4)

for damage, leakage, and security of

mounting.

TA 092311

2-62 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10





EQUIPMENT IS

ITEMB D A W M



adjusted as needed

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:NO.

• d. Inspect all hydraulic lines and hoses for

leaks, abrasions, and damaged fittings.


leaks.

• e. Operate crane through full range of

elevation, rotation, and boom extension

to determine performance of crane,

hoist, and crane controls. Movement

should be free and without hydraulic

leaks.

Crane is inoperative.


42

•

REAR WINCH AND CONTROLS

(M936)

/ Inspect hoist cable for breaks, kinks, and

frays. Check sheaves for damage.

• a. Remove oil level plug from winch gear

case. If level is below level plug hole, fill to

bottom of hole.

• b. Visually check winch hoses and lines for

signs of deterioration and leakage.

Cuts, breaks, abra

sions, or evidence

of Class III leaks.

• c. Check for secure connections.

•

•

d. Check cable for kinks, frays, and breaks.

EXPANSIBLE VANS

(M934.M935)

e. Check all winch controls for proper

operation.

No control response.

43 HYDRAULIC LIFT GATE

(M935 Only)

• a. Inspect lift gate, lift arms, and support

assemblies for bends or breaks.

•

•

b. Inspect hydraulic hoses for leaks,

abrasions, and damaged fittings.


leaks.

c. Operate hydraulic liftgate through full

range of movement to determine

performance and control response.

No control response.

TA 092312

Change 1 2-63

TM 9-2320-272-10



B-Bafore operation D-During operation A-After operation W-Weekly M-Monthly


EQUIPMENT IS

NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:



adjusted as needed

B D A W MNO.

44 VAN EXTERIOR

• Check for condition and proper function Van will not expand.

of panels, doors, ladders, stabilizers,

receptacles, and power cable.

45

•

VAN ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

a. Operate all switches to determine that all Electrical system will not

function properly and that power ceiling operate.

lights are on.

• b. Open doors to determine reliability of

blackout switches.

• c. Visually inspect cables and harnesses for

abrasions, breaks, or loose connections.

• d. Operate liftgate interior controls to

determine if liftgate electrical controls

SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS

are working properly (M935 only).

46 A-FRAME KIT

a. Make sure cable is secure in pintle and

pintle is locked in closed position.

• b. Make sure all cable clamps are secure A-frame cable is frayed

and cable is not frayed or broken. or broken.

• c. Inspect A-frame for bends and secure

mounting at front bumper. Make sure it

is positioned at about a 60° angle.

• d. Inspect winch cable for kinks, frays, or Winch cable is frayed or

47 AIRBRAKE CONTROL KIT

breaks. broken.

• Before going on open road, make sure airbrake Trailer brakes do not

hand control lever is working properly by actuate.

moving lever down to apply brakes to towed

vehicle and moving lever up to release brakes.

TA 092313

2-64 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10





NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:



adjusted as needed

B D A W MNO.

48 ELECTRIC BRAKE KIT

• Make sure rheostat is set properly by Trailer brakes do

depressing service brake pedal to determine not actuate.

if electric brakes on towed vehicle are

applied. Adjust rheostat setting

if necessary.

49 ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT

• a. Inspect hardtop enclosure and quilted

engine compnrtment cover for good

condition.

• b. Inspect electric fuel pump and fuel lines Any fuel leakage evident

located near air cleaner assembly for Fuel pump inoperable.

damage and leakage.

c. Inspect fuel burning personnel and engine

coolant heaters for the following:

• (I) Fuel lines and connections for signs of Evidence of any fuel

leakage. leakage.

• (2) Make sure all coolant shutoff

cocks are open.

• (3) Engine coolant heater hoses for Evidence of Class III

abrasions and leakage. leaks.

• (4) Make sure air intake and Evidence of any exhaust

exhaust tubes are not leakage.

damaged and are free from

obstructions.

• (5) Check heater controls by

depressing indicator lamps to make

sure they illuminate.

• (6) Listen for unusual noises from

heaters during operation.

I

TA 092314

Change 1 2-65

TM 9-2320-272-10





NOT READY/

AVAILABLE IF:

ITEM

NO.



adjusted as needed

B D A W M

50 DEEP WATER FORDING KIT

•

•

a. Tighten fuel tank filler cap(s).

b. Make sure all battery filler caps are

present and secure.

• c. Make sure transmission dipstick is

secured in filler tube.

• d. Check operation of control handle. Make

sure fording valves open and close.

TA 092315

2-66 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS

2-10. General.

This section provides instructions for vehicle operations under moderate temperature,

humidity, and terrain conditions. For vehicle operations under unusual conditions, refer

to section IV of this chapter.

NOTE

Before you attempt to operate your vehicle be sure to perform the

preventive maintenance checks and services shown in table 2-2.

2-1 1 . Starting the Engine (Above +32°F) (0°C).

a. Make certain parking brakes are engaged. If not, apply brakes. Turn knob on the

end of handbrake lever handle (4) to adjust brake cable tension and pull up on

handbrake lever (4).

| b. Adjust operator's seat. Refer to page 2-7.

c. Adjust (left and right) rear view mirrors. Make sure both mirrors provide a clear

rear view.

d. Make sure vehicle front and side windows are clean. If not, clean windows before

attempting to start vehicle.

e. On vehicles with a front winch, make certain transmission power takeoff control

lever (3) is on DISENGAGE, and front winch control lever (2) is in "N" (neutral).

/ On vehicles so equipped, make certain transfer power takeoff control lever (5) is

locked in neutral (full forward) position. In dump models (M929, M930) this lever

serves as the dump body control lever. In such vehicles make certain control lever (5) is

locked in neutral (full up) position.

g. Place automatic transmission gearshift lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.

TA 092316

Change 1 2-67

TM 9-2320-272-10

h. Make sure emergency fuel cutoff lever

(15) is pushed in all the way.

i. Check air cleaner indicator (3). If red

appears, indicating air restriction, notify

organizational maintenance.

/ Place battery switch (6) in ON position.

k. Depress accelerator pedal (2).

CAUTION

Do not operate starter continuously for more than 10 seconds at

a time or with headlights on (which will drain the batteries). Wait

10 to 15 seconds between periods of starter operations.

/. Place ignition switch (7) in START position. Release lever after engine starts.

Lever will return automatically to RUN position.

m. If necessary, adjust hand throttle control (5) until tachometer (8) indicates engine

is operating at 700 to 800 rpm.

n. Allow engine to warm up approximately five minutes at 700 to 800 rpm. If

engaged, unlock hand throttle control (5) by turning it left or right, and push it in to

allow engine speed to drop to idle after warm-up period.

|ll II H

TA 092317

2-68 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

o. Check your instruments:

CAUTION

If any instrument reading is not normal, stop engine by turning

ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6) to OFF positions and

notify organizational maintenance.

(1) Air/reservoir pressure gages (10) and (12) should rise from 0 to 90 psi (0 to

620.5 kPa) before warning light (4) goes out and warning buzzer stops. Normal

operating pressures for both gages is 120 psi (827 kPa).

(2) Oil pressure gage (13) should register 15 psi (103.4 kPa).

(3) Battery-generator indicator (11) should read in green area.

(4) Fuel gage (14) indicates fuel level in fuel tank(s).

p. Pull out emergency fuel cutoff lever (15) if any of the following conditions occur:

(1) Noisy engine and/or excessive engine vibration.

(2) Oil pressure does not register or suddenly drops to less than 15 psi (103.4 kPa)

as indicated by oil pressure gage (13).

(3) Sudden increase in coolant temperature beyond normal operating temperature.

165°F to I95°F (74° C to 90°C) as indicated by engine coolant temperature gage (9).

(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6) are

turned to OFF positions.

NOTE

If emergency shutdown was necessary, notify organizational

maintenance.

q. Turn vehicle light switch (16) to STOPLIGHT position.

TA 090176

•

2-69

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-12. Cold Weather Starting (Below +32°F) (0°C).

a. Perform steps a through / on pages

2-67 and 2-68.

b. Depress cold start button (I) during

cranking and hold in for three seconds.

Upon releasing button, allow three seconds,

for ether to discharge into system.

CAUTION

Do not operate starter continuously for more than 10 seconds at

a time or with headlights on. Wait 10 to 15 seconds between

periods of starter operation.

c. Perform steps 2a through 2c if fuel

pump needs to be primed on page 3-30.

NOTE

If engine cranks, but will not start, turn battery switch (3) to off

position and notify organizational maintenance of ether cold start

failure or fuel system failure.

d. Release ignition switch lever (4) after engine starts. Lever (4) returns

automatically to RUN position.

e. If engine needs additional ether to prevent stalling perform stepb again. Once

engine reaches 98° F (37° C), ether can no longer be discharged into system.

/ Check your instruments! Refer to items o(l) through o(4) on page 2-69.

g. Adjust hand throttle control (2) until tachometer (5) indicates engine is operating

at 700 to 800 rpm.

h. Allow engine to warm up approximately ten minutes at 700-800 rpm. After warm-

up period, unlock hand throttle control (2) by turning it left or right and push control

(2) in, to allow engine speed to drop to normal idle.

/. Stop engine immediately by pulling out emergency fuel cut-off lever (7) if at any

time one or more of the following conditions arise:

(1) Noisy engine and /or excessive engine vibration.

(2) Oil pressure docs not register or suddenly drops to less than 5 psi (34 kPa) at

idle, or 38 psi (262 kPa) when vehicle is in motion (normal operation).

TA 092318

2-70 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(3) Sudden increase in engine coolant temperature as indicated by gage (6).

Normal operating temperature is 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90°C).

(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch lever (4) and battery switch lever

(3) are turned off.

/'. After emergency shutdown, have above conditions corrected by organizational

maintenance before attempting to restart engine.

NOTE

After engine stops, exit vehicle, raise the hood and manually

reposition fuel cut-off valve (9) located on the left side of engine

above the fuel pump (8). Move valve from cut-off position (9a)

to operating position (9).

TA 092319

Change 1 2-71

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-13. Placing and Sustaining Vehicle in Motion.

WARNING

Do not put vehicle in motion until warning light (8) and buzzer

stop. Air pressure gages (1 2) and (1 3) should indicate at least 90

psi (620 kPa). If warnings continue beyond three minutes and/or

pressure gages do not reach 90 psi (620 kPa), turn ignition switch

lever (10) and battery switch lever (9) to OFF positions and

notify organizational maintenance.

e. With transmission shift lever (l) in

neutral, select transfer driving range:

a. Be sure all auxiliary equipment and

tools are locked and stored for travel.

b. Perform steps a through j in

paragraph 2-11.

c. Start engine. Refer to paragraph 2-11

and 2-12 on preceding pages for

instructions.

d. Set vehicle light switch (7). See

paragraph 2-16 for light switch operating

instructions.

CAUTION

Do not shift transfer (3) from

HIGH (3b) to LOW (3a) or

LOW to HIGH unless

transmission (1) is in "N"

(neutral) position.

(1) Depress lockout switch (2) and

shift transfer shift lever (3) down to HIGH

gear position (3b) for normal driving

conditions.

(2) Depress lockout switch (2) and

shift transfer shift lever (3) up to LOW gear

position (3a) if vehicle is heavily loaded,

facing a steep grade, and/or operating off

the road.

/ Depress brake pedal (6).

g. Disengage mechanical and spring

parking brake handbrake lever (4) by

pushing the lever full forward to the floor.

TA 092320

2-72 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Do not back up without a ground guide.

h. Engage vehicle transmission (1).

(1) Select "1-5" (drive) if operation is on good roads, grades, and traffic

conditions.

(2) Select "1-4" (fourth) gear if operation is over moderately hilly road grades,

moderate traffic, restricted road speeds.

(3) Select "1-3" (third) gear if traffic is slow, heavy, and /or speed limits are low.

(4) Select "1-2" (second) gear if operation is over steep grades, in heavy traffic,

and/or rough terrain.

(5) Select "1" (first) when starting under heavy loads, operating on extreme grades,

and/or rough terrain.

/'. Release brake pedal (6) and depress accelerator pedal (5). Accelerate at a safe,

steady speed.

CAUTION

• Do not allow engine speed to exceed 2IOOrpm in any transmission

gear ratio, as shown on the tachometer (II).

• Do not accelerate at full power when upshifting or downshifting

from or to forward driving range "I" (first).

/'. Upshift or downshift transmission shift lever (I) whenever road and/or traffic

conditions change.

TA 092321

Change 1 2-73

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Do not coast downhill with transmission in "N" (neutral). Vehicle

may go out of control.

CAUTION

• Do not shift transfer shift lever (6) when transmission is in gear.

Transmission must be in "N" (neutral) before shifting transfer gear

from HIGH to LOW or LOW to HJGH.

• Never shift transfer shift lever (6) from HIGH gear to LOW

gear range until vehicle is slowed down to 22 miles per hour

(35.4 kilometers per hour) or less.

k. Upshift or downshift transfer shift lever (6) as required by vehicle speed and/or

changes in road or traffic conditions.

(1) To shift transfer shift lever (6) from HIGH (6b) to LOW (6a) when vehicle is

in motion:

(a) Slow vehicle to 22 miles per hour (35.4 kilometers per hour) or less as

indicated by speedometer (1).

(b) Shift transmission shift lever (2) to "N" (neutral) gear position (3).

(c) Depress lockout switch (5) with thumb and shift transfer shift lever from HIGH

(6b) up to LOW (6a) position.

(d) Release transfer shift lever (6) and shift transmission shift lever (2) into "1-5"

(drive) (4).

(2) To shift transfer shift lever (6) from LOW (6a) to HIGH (6b) when vehicle is in

motion:

(a) Shift transmission shift lever (6) to "N" (neutral) (3).

TA 092322

2-74 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(b) Depress lockout switch (5) with thumb and shift transfer shift lever (6) down to

HIGH (6b) position.

(c) Release transfer shift lever (6) and shift transmission shift lever (2) into "1-5"

(drive) (4).

/. Apply brake pedal (9) on-and-off as needed when going down a grade.

WARNING

Do not back up without a ground guide.

CAUTION

Do not back up with transfer shift lever (6) in LOW driving range

(6a).

m. To drive in reverse:

(1) Stop vehicle. Refer to a and b, paragraph 2-14.

(2) Have another person act as a ground guide \jo direct backup operation.

(3) Place transmission shift lever (2) in "R" (reverse) position (7).

(4) Release brake pedal (9) and slowly depress accelerator pedal (8).

(5) Observe directions from ground guide.

(6) Release accelerator pedal (8) and apply brake pedal (9) to stop vehicle.

NOTE

Park on hard surface if possible.

TA 092323

Change 1 2-75

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-14. Stopping the Vehicle and Engine.

a. Release accelerator pedal (3).

b. Apply service brakes (4) to bring

vehicle. to a gradual stop.

c. Move transmission shift lever (l) to

"N" (neutral) position (5).

NOTE

Park on hard surface if possible.

d. If vehicle must be backed into parking

position, have another person act as a

ground guide to direct backup operation

(para 2- 13, m).

e. Engage parking brakes by pulling up

on parking brake hand lever (2).

CAUTION

Do not shut down engine if engine temperature

gage (9) is above 195°F (90° C).

/ Let engine idle for five minutes if temperature gage (9)

reads above 195°F (90° C).

g. Turn vehicle light switch (6) to OFF position.

h. Place ignition switch lever (8) and battery switch lever

(7) in OFF position.

TA 092324

2-76 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Do not remove surge tank filler cap if temperature gage (9) reads

above 195°F (90°C). Do not add coolant when engine is hot

unless engine is running. Add coolant slowly.

/'. Pull out emergency fuel cutoff control (11) when any of the following conditions

occur:

(1) Noisy engine and/or excessive engine vibration.

(2) Oil pressure gage (10) does not register or suddenly drops to less than 15 psi

(103.4 kPa) at idle or 38 psi (262 kPa) when vehicle is in motion (normal operation).

(3) Sudden increase in coolant temperature.

(4) Engine continues to run after ignition switch (8) and battery switch (7) are in

OFF position.

/'. After emergency shutdown, notify organizational maintenance.

k. Perform After Operation services in table 2-2. Make log book entries prescribed

according to TM 38-750.

TA 090184

2-77

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-15. Using Slave Receptacle to Start Engine.

a. Position right side of slaving (recharging) vehicle to the right side of vehicle

needing battery jump.

b. Stop slaving vehicle engine.

c. Pull cover (4) from slave receptacle (3) of disabled vehicle. Handle (1) on right side

of vehicle cab identifies receptacle location.

CAUTION

When slaving, always connect slave cable to disabled vehicle first.

Damage to batteries or cable may result from improperly connecting

hot batteries before connecting cable to receptacle of disabled

vehicle.

d. Connect slave cable (2) to disabled vehicle.

e. Pull cover (4) from slave receptacle (3) of slaving vehicle. Handle (1) on right side

of vehicle cab identifies receptacle location.

NOTE

Make sure all unnecessary electrical switches in both vehicles are

turned OFF.

/.' Start slaving vehicle engine. Pull out hand throttle control (5) until idle speed is at

1,000 to 1,100 rpm. Refer to paragraphs 2-1 1 and 2-12.

g. Start slaved vehicle engine.

h. After engine starts, disconnect slave cable (2) from both vehicles.

/. Put cover (4) back over receptacle (3).

j. Clean and stow slaving cable.

k. Operate slaved vehicle. If battery indicator dial (6) is in red or yellow area after

two hours of normal operation, notify organizational maintenance.

TA 090185

2-78

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-16. Operation of Vehicle Service Lights.

NOTE

Unlock button (7) must be depressed to unlock light switch lever (8).

a. To illuminate instrument panel: turn switch lever (8) to either "SER DRV".

"PARK". "BLACKOUT MKR". or "BLACKOUT DRV", position.

b. For normal daylight driving, turn switch lever (8) to "STOP TURN" position.

c. For night driving, turn switch lever (8) to "SER DRV" position.

NOTE

Unlock switch (7) does not need to be depressed to unlock switch

lever (8) for either blackout position.

d. In blackout operation:

(1) Turn switch lever (8) to "BLACKOUT DRV" position when vehicle is

underway.

(2) Turn switch lever (8) to "BLACKOUT MKR" position when vehicle stops.

e. To illuminate parked vehicle at night, turn switch lever (8) to "PARK" position.

TA 090186

2-79

TM 9-2320-272-10

LEVER POSITION

SER

DRV

STOP

TURN

B.O.

MKR

B.O.

DRVPARK OFF

SYSTEMS OPERATED

X X X , X PANEL LIGHT

X X X SERVICE STOP LIGHTS

X BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHTS

X X BLACKOUT MARKERS AND TAIL LIGHTS

X X XSERVICE TURN INDICATOR (LEFT AND

RIGHT)

X X X STOP LIGHTS

X X PARKING LIGHTS

X SERVICE HEAD LIGHTS

X X BLACKOUT STOP LIGHTS

/ Move turning signal lever (2) up for

right turns, down for left turns.

g. For hazard warning lights (blinking

lights):

(1) Turn main switch lever (1) to

STOP TURN position.

(2) Depress hazard tab button (3) and

move turning signal lever (2) up to lock tab

in position.

(3) To deactivate, move turning signal

lever (2) back to neutral. Hazard tab button

(3) will automatically disengage.

TA 092325

2-80 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-17. Raising and Securing Cab Hood.

a. General. All M939 vehicles are

equipped with a tilt hood which provides

easy access to the engine compartment.

b. Raising and Securing Hood.

(I) Release left and right hood latches |

(4)

(2) Remove retaining pin (8) from

safety bar hood bracket (6) and swing

safety bar (9) toward front of hood.

(3) % While standing against front

bumper, pull hood forward by grasping

hood handle (5).

I

(4) Once hood is raised, secure safety

bar (9) to bumper bracket (7) with hood

safety bar retaining pin (8).

WARNING

Make sure hood safety bar

retaining pin (8) is placed

completely through end of safety

bar (9) once bar is attached to

bumper bracket (7). Failure to

properly install retaining pin (8)

will result in serious injury or

damage to equipment.

TA 092326

Change 1 2-81

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-18. Removing Cab Top and Lowering Windshield.

NOTE

This operation is best

accomplished by the operator and

one crewmember.

a. Roll down right and left cab windows.

b. Untie rope (3) from side handles (5).

c. Remove rope (3) from hooks (4) at the

rear of cab.

d. Release fasteners (l) from left and

right side roof rails (7) and rear interior of

cab.

e. From inside cab, push up paulin top (2) from pillar post channels (6). Fold top

over windshield.

2-82

TM 9-2320-272-10

Ik. Loosen knobs (13) on left and right

sides of windshield frame with a hammer.

Knobs turn counterclockwise to loosen.

i. Lift up on crossbar (12) to free pillar

post (6) and crossbars from cab. Lower

crossbar and pillar post assembly to the

ground.

/ Reach over windshield frame (11) and

free windshield catches (15) from hood

mounts. Push catches forward and out of

the way.

/. Fold windshield frame (11) forward

toward hood (14). Lay frame gently on

hood.

m. Secure frame (11) in place with

windshield catches (15).

n. To install cab paulin top (2), reverse steps a through m.

o. Clean and fold paulin top (2). Refer to paragraph 2-7 for paulin cleaning

procedures.

p. Store paulin top (2), overhead staves (8), and crossbar assembly (12) as directed

by person in charge.

TA 092327

Change 1 2-83

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-19. Operation of Front Winch.

a. Preparation for Use:

(1) Park vehicle directly facing object

to be winched. Place transmission shift

lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.

NOTE

If vehicle cannot be parked in a

direct line with object to be

winched, see paragraph 2-19?.

(2) Engage parking brake by pulling

up hand brake lever (2).

(3) Turn ignition switch lever (4) and

battery switch lever (3) to OFF.

(4) Check oil level in hydraulic oil

reservoir (5). Refer to paragraph 2-4 for

locations of hydraulic oil reservoirs in

various models.

CAUTION

Before opening reservoir, make

sure the area around the reservoir

cap (6) is clean. Do not allow dirt,

dust, or rain to enter reservoir.

CAUTION

Do not proceed with winch

operation if oil level is less than

halfway from end of dipstick to

FULL mark (8) on wrecker

models or below the fourth

notch (7) from end of dipstick

on all other models. Fill to top

notch.

b. Unwinding Winch Cable.

(1) Free winch cable chain (9) and

hook from truck.

(2) Pull out drum lock knob (11),

rotate 90 degrees and release.

(3) On wrecker vehicles:

(a) Pull out level wind lock knob (10),

rotate 90 degrees and release.

(b) Pull out cable tensioner lock knob

(13) with left hand and push tensioner lever

(12) toward the right side of the vehicle

(crew side) with right hand. Release lock

knob (13).

TA 092328

2-84 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Wear leather gloves when

handling winch cable. Do not

allow cable to run through

hands. Broken wires cause

painful injuries.

(4) Pull out needed length of cable. Do

not allow cable to knot or kink.

(1) Attach utility chain (19) to lifting

shackles (20) or pintle hook of load.

(2) If load is very heavy or deeply

mired, install a snatch block (17) to

increase winch pulling power. To rig a

snatch block (17):

(a) Unwind enough cable to reach the

load and back to the front winch (14).

Attach cable chain hook (16) to lifting

shackle (15).

CAUTION

Leave at least four turns of

cable on winch drum. Refer to

table 1-10 for winch load

capacities.

c. Rigging the Load.

(b) Turn snatch block hook (23) to the

right. Lift up rear of snatch block (17) and

open support link (21). Insert cable (22).

Lift up rear of snatch block (17) to lower

and lock support link (21) to snatch block

hook. Return hook.

(c) Attach utility chain (19) to lifting shackles (20) or pintle hook of load. Attach

snatch block hook (23) to utility chain (19).

NOTE

Medium wrecker (M936) is equipped with field chocks ( 1 8) for heavy

recovery operations. Refer to paragraph 2-2 1 for field chock ( 18) use.

(3) Disengage the brakes, transmission, and transfer case of vehicle being retrieved.

TA 090192

2-85

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Pulling Load.

WARNING

Direct all personnel to stand clear of cable. A snapped cable can

cause serious injuries.

NOTE

This operation requires two crewmembers.

(1) Start engine.

(2) Direct crewmember to release

hinged latch (2) and pull clutch lever (3) as

far back as it will go away from winch.

(3) On vehicles with level wind device

(1) direct crewmember to pull out tensioner

lever lock knob (5) and pull tensioner lever

(4) back. Aline lock knob (5) with hole in

tensioner housing and release.

(4) Put transfer case shift lever (6)

down to HIGH gear.

(5) With brakes engaged, place transmission shift lever (8) in "1-5" (drive) position

and pull transmission power takeoff lever (9) back to ENGAGED position. Return

transmission shift lever (8) to "N" (neutral) position.

WARNING

Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate winch at erratic

speeds. High speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped cable.

(6) Pull front winch control lever (10)

back to WIND position. Hold for winding.

(7) On winches without level wind, be

sure each layer of cable winds evenly. If

necessary, push cable in place with a length

of wood.

(8) Regulate winch winding speed by

depressing accelerator pedal (7) or by

pulling out hand throttle control (11).

TA 092329

2-86 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(9) Release winch control lever (10) to

stop winding. Lever spring returns to

neutral (lock) position.

CAUTION

If temperature is above 70° F

(21°C), stop winding operation

by releasing winch control lever

(10) after every 100 feet of cable

has been winched in. Rest six

minutes. During period of rest,

leave truck engine idling and

power takeoff control lever (9)

engaged.

(3) Attach snatch block (13) to winch

instructions if necessary.

e. Pulling Indirect Loads.

(1) If vehicle (16) cannot be lined up in

a direct line with load (12), line vehicle up

to a reliable go-between object such as a

large tree (15).

CAUTION

Do not proceed with front winch

operation if direct pull or use of a

go-between object is unavailable.

(2) Unwind enough cable (17) to reach

go-between object (15) and load (12). Refer

to b for unwinding cable instructions if

necessary.

able. Refer to c(2) for snatch block rigging

(4) Rig utility chain (14) from go-between object (15) to the snatch block (13).

Attach cable chain to pintle hook or lifting shackles of load (12). Refer to c for rigging


(5) Wind cable. Stop winding when

cable chain reaches snatch block. Refer to d

for winding instructions if necessary.

(6) Briefly push front winch control

lever (10) forward to WINCH position.

Cable will unwind (loosen) to permit

removal of snatch block (13). Return winch

control lever (10) to neutral (lock)

position.

NOTE

If load is on a slope, block wheels

of load before loosening cable.

(7) Remove snatch block (13) and

utility chain (14).

(8) Continue winding operation.

TA 092330

Change 1 2-87

TM 9-2320-272-10

/ Lifting and Lowering Loads.

(1) A-frame kit is used with front winch for lifting and lowering operations.

A-frame kit is installed and rigged by organizational maintenance. Refer to paragraph

2-306 for A-frame instructions.

WARNING

Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts

or breaks high voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high

voltage line is in contact with A-frame or vehicle. Serious or fatal

injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have electrical

power turned off.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to lift loads heavier than 3,000 pounds with A-frame

kit.

(2) Rig winch cable chain and hook to load. Refer to c in paragraph 2-19 for

rigging instructions.

WARNING

Do not lower load without a ground guide. Direct all personnel to

stand clear of lifting operation. Swinging loads can cause serious

injury.

(3) To lift load, follow same winding

instructions as in d.

(4) To lower load:

(a) Push front winch control lever (2)

forward to WINCH position.

(b) Observe directions of ground

guide.

(c) After load has been lowered as

indicated by the ground guide, return

control lever (2) to neutral (lock) position.

(d) Direct crewmember to maintain

manual tension on cable while load is

unrigged.

g. After Winch Operation.

(1) Direct crewmember to maintain manual tension on cable.

(2) Pull front winch control lever (2) back to WIND.

(3) Watch crewmember for signal indicating cable chain coupling is approaching

drum.

TA 092331

2-88 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Release winch control lever (2) when signalled by crewmember.

(5) Direct crewmember to:

(a) Disengage drum clutch by pushing

clutch control lever (7) toward the winch.

CAUTION

Do not force clutch control lever

(7). If lever does not easily

disengage, slightly engage winch

control lever (2) in WIND until

clutch control lever (7) returns

without force.

(b) Swing latch (6) down to lock

clutch control lever (7) in disengaged

position.

(c) Pull out drum lock knob (8), rotate

90 degrees and release. If necessary, rotate

drum by hand to allow drum lock plunger

to engage.

(d) On winches with level wind device, manually push level wind (12) full to the

operator side of level wind frame. Pull out level wind lock knob (14), rotate 90 degrees

and release. If necessary, jiggle level wind to assure lock plunger engages.

(6) Push transmission power takeoff control lever (1) forward to DISENGAGE

position.

h. Preparing Winch for Travel.

(I) On winches without level wind:

(a) Put cable chain (11) under and over right frame extension then across the top

of bumper. Attach cable hook (10) to the left lifting shackle (9).

(b) Remove right lifting shackle (5) by unsnapping pin lock (3) and removing

shackle bolt (4). Place lifting shackle (5) over chain (1 1) and reinstall shackle (5).

(2) On winches with level wind:

(a) Pull cable chain (15) up through

the space between the bumper and the

winch.

(b) Wind cable chain around level

wind frame and attach hook (1?) to the

frame.

(3) Clean snatch block and other

equipment used in winch operation and

stow in place. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for

general cleaning instructions.

TA 090196

2-89

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-20. Operation of Cargo Trucks.

a. General. M923 through M926 cargo trucks have 7 by 14 foot (2.135 by 4.27 meter)

cargo beds. M927 and M928 cargo trucks have 7 by 20 foot (2.135 by 6.1 meter) beds.

All can be equipped with troopseat and paulin kits.

b. Lowering Tailgate.

WARNING

On dropside trucks, make certain

forward end of dropsides are

engaged before lowering tailgate.

(1) Remove hooks (1) from retainer

slots on both sides of tailgate.

(2) Grasp top of tailgate and pull it

back. Do not allow tailgate to drop.

i\ III IT

(3) On dropside trucks, turn locking

handles (3) on sides of tailgate counter

clockwise to loosen. Grasp ring (2) and

twist to turn T-bolt (4) vertically up.

Withdraw locking handle assembly. Do the

same operation on the opposite end of

tailgate.

(4) Grasp top of tailgate and pull it

back. Do not allow tailgate to drop.

c. Low ering and Raising Troopseats

(1) To lower troopseats, pul! troopseat supports (8) forward 45 degrees, release

latches (7) and lower seats.

(2) Adjust each troopseat support (8) to contact both the side and floor of the

truck.

(3) On dropside trucks, install troopseat locking rods (9) in hole (12) near tailgate.

Locking rod (9) can be shortened or lengthened. To adjust locking rod:

TA 090197

2-90

TM 9-2320-272-10

(a) Loosen locknut (10).

(b) Turn threaded end (1 1) clockwise

to shorten, counterclockwise to lengthen.

(c) Tighten locknut (10).

(4) To raise troopseat, reverse

procedure just given.

d. Removing Front and Side Racks.

(1) Lower tailgate. Refer to b if necessary.

(2) Raise troopseats and secure in place with latches (7). Refer to c if necessary.

(3) On dropside trucks:

(a) Remove troopseat locking rods (9) from holes near tailgate. Install safety pin

(6) to secure locking rods (9) to side rack bracket (5).

(b) Pull back four troopseat securing

pins (13) from corners of truck bed.

—hli

1—i

r

I

TA 090198

2-91

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Lift and remove front rack (2).

NOTE


(5) Lift and remove side racks (1).

e. Installing Front and Side Racks.

(1) Reverse procedures (1) through (5)

in d.

(2) When installing front rack, be sure

front rack retainer clip (3) is inserted in side

rack rings (4).

/ Lowering and Raising Dropsides.

(I) Park vehicle where it can best be

loaded or unloaded. Turn ignition switch

and battery switch lever to OFF and apply

handbrake.

(2) Turn locking handle (7) counterclockwise to loosen. Grasp ring (8) and twist to

turn T-bolt (6) in vertical up position. Remove locking handle (7) and repeat operation

on opposite end of dropside.

WARNING

Make sure troopseat securing pins (5) are engaged before lowering

dropside.

NOTE

TA 090199

2-92

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Make sure forward ends of dropsi

lowering tailgate.

(4) To load from both sides:

(a) Lower tailgate. Refer to b(2) if

necessary.

(b) Remove locking handles (7) on

right side. Lower right dropside (9). Repeat

operation on left dropside.

(5) To raise dropside:

(a) Raise dropside and install T-bolt

(6) at forward end. Place T-bolt in slot,

turn 90 degrees and hold in position with

ring (8). Turn locking handle (7) clockwise

to tighten.

(b) Raise opposite dropside and secure

it in position.

(6) Raise tailgate and install left rear

and right rear locking handles (7).

es are both secured before

TA 090200

2-93

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-21 . Operation of Medium Wrecker.

a. General. The medium wrecker (M936) has a hydraulic crane and front and rear

winches. The truck's winch and towing capacities are adequate for recovering all

wheeled vehicles. The medium wrecker also removes and replaces engines, power packs,

and gun tubes.

b. Front Winch Operation.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-19 for

operating instructions.

(2) Install field chocks (4) for heavy

recovery operations or operations on

slippery terrain. To install chocks:

(a) Remove chocks (4) from storage

area at left rear of wrecker body.

(b) Insert chocks (4) in left and right

brackets (2) beneath the front bumper.

Insert bolt (1) through bracket (2) and yoke

(3) to secure chock in place.

(c) Dig two 12-inch (30.5 centimeter)

holes at spade-end of chocks. Insert ends

(5) in holes.

c. Rear Winch Operation.

(1) Position rear of wrecker in direct

line with load to be winched if possible.

(2) Engage parking brake (15) and

turn ignition switch lever (8) and battery

switch lever (7) to OFF.

TA 092332

2-94 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(3) Check oil level in hydraulic oil

reservoir (19).

7 M\r%

(4):

(4) For heavy pulls, install field chocks

CAUTION

Before opening reservoir,

make sure the area around

reservoir cap is clean. Do not

allow dirt, dust, or rain to

enter reservoir.

Do not proceed with winch

operation if oil level is less

than halfway from end of

dipstick to full mark (18). Fill

as needed.

(a) Remove chocks (4) from storage


(b) For direct pulls install chocks

facing the load in left and right chock

brackets (20) beneath rear bumperettes.

Insert bolt (1) through bracket (20) and

yoke (3) to secure each chock in place.

(c) For indirect pulls, install chocks (4)

in brackets (20) on left side of rear

bumperette for left side pulls or in brackets

on right side of bumperettes for right angle

pulls.

(d) Dig two 12-inch (30.5 centimeter) holes at spade end of chocks. Insert chock

ends in holes.

(5) Start engine.

(6) Pull out hand throttle control lever (6) and set engine speed at 900 revolutions

per minute as indicated by tachometer (9).

(7) Place transfer case shift lever (14) in neutral.

(8) Disengage parking brake (15) and place brake lock switch (12) in LOCK

position.

(9) Place transmission shift lever (13) in "1-3" (third) gear for heavy loads or in "1- I

5" (drive) for light loads. '

(10) Unlock safety latch (16) and pull transfer power takeoff lever (17) back to

ENGAGED position.

(11) Turn on floodlight control switch (10) if operation is at night and tactical

situation permits.

(12) Turn on amber warning light switch (11) if tactical situation permits.

TA 092333

Change 1 2-95

TM 9-2320-272-10

(13) Release level wind (1) by pulling

out lock knob (2), rotating it 90 degrees

and releasing knob.

(14) Turn on floodlights (5) if

operation is at night and tactical situation

permits.

(15) Push torque control lever (7)

forward to HIGH.

NOTE

Torque control lever must be

engaged in HIGH or LOW

before directional control lever

(6) can be operated.

WARNING

Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not allow cable

to run through hands. Broken wires cause painful injuries.

(16) To unwind winch cable:

(a) Briefly push directional control

lever (6) forward to UNWIND until winch

cable hook and chain (3) are loosened from

rear bumperettes (4).

(b) Direct crewmember to free cable

hook and chain (3) from bumperettes (4).

(c) With crewmember maintaining manual tension on cable, push directional

control lever (6) forward to UNWIND. Pull throttle control lever (8) back to increase

drum turning speed and forward to decrease speed.

(d) After required length of cable has been unwound, return directional control

lever (6) to neutral.

TA 090203

2-96

TM 9-2320-272-10

(17) To rig the load:

(a) Attach utility chain (10) to lifting

shackles (11) or pintle hook of load (12).

(b) If load is very heavy or deeply

mired, install snatch block (16) or

combination of snatch blocks to increase

winch pulling power. To rig a snatch block:

/. Unwind enough cable (14) to reach

the load and back to rear winch. Rig cable

hook and chain (3) to rear bumperette (4).

2. Turn snatch block hook (15) to the right. Lift up rear of snatch block and open

support link (13). Insert cable (14). Lift up rear of snatch block and lower and lock

support link (13) to hook (15). Return hook.

3. Rig snatch block hook (15) to load (12).

(18) Disengage the brakes, transmission, and transfer of vehicle being retrieved.

WARNING

Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch operation. A snapped

cable can cause serious injuries.

(19) To pull load:

(a) Keep torque control lever (7) forward in HIGH for light loads or pull lever (7)

back to LOW for heavy loads.

(b) Put cable tensioner switch (9) down to engage tensioner.

TA 090204

2-97

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Do not operate winch at high speeds. Do not operate at erratic

speeds. High speed or erratic winding can result in a snapped

(c) Pull directional control lever (1)

back to WIND.

(d) Pull throttle control lever (3) back

to increase drum turning speed.

(20) To shift torque control lever (2)

from LOW to HIGH or HIGH to LOW:

(a) Push directional control lever (1)

forward to neutral (lock) position.

(b) Push throttle control lever (3) full

forward, to lowest engine speed.

(c) Shift torque control lever (2).

(d) pull directional control lever (1)

back to resume winding.

(e) Adjust throttle control lever (3) to

desired engine speed and resume winding.

(21) Move directional control lever (1) to neutral (lock) to stop winding.

(22) Briefly push directional control lever (1) forward to UNWIND position to

loosen cable lor unrigging.

used.

(23) Remove winch cable chain and hook (10) from load. Remove snatch blocks if

(24) Pull directional control lever (I) back to WIND. Release directional control

lever to stop WIND operation when cable chain (8) approaches guide rollers (12).

7

TA 090205

2-98

TM 9-2320-272-10

(25) To prepare rear winch for travel:

(a) Manually push level wind (6) full to the right. Pull out drum lock knob (7),

rotate 90 degrees and release. If necessary, jiggle level wind (6) to assure lock plunger

engages.

(b) Place cable chain hook (10) up through right bumperette (9) and down through

left bumperette (11).

(c) Place hook (10) around chain (8) between bumperettes.

(d) Briefly pull directional control lever (1) back to WIND to remove cable chain

slack. Return lever (1) to neutral when cable is snug.

(26) Pull cable tensioner switch (4) up to disengage tensioner.

(27) Pull torque control lever (2) in

neutral.

(28) Turn off floodlights (5) if used.

(29) Pull transfer power takeoff

control lever (19) forward to

DISENGAGE, and lock in position.

(30) Put transmission shift lever (16) in

"N" (neutral) position.

(31) Turn off main floodlight switch

(17).

(32) Disengage brake lock switch (14)

and engage parking brake lever (18).

(33) Turn off amber warning light

switch (15) if used.

(34) If field chocks (13) were used:

(a) Make sure transfer shift lever (20)

is down to HIGH.

(b) Release parking brake lever (18).

(c) Place transmission shift lever (16)

in "1-5" (drive) to move vehicle ahead far

enough to free chocks (13).

(d) Stop vehicle and engage parking brake lever (18).

(e) Re/nove field chocks (13), clean as time permits and stow chocks in storage


(35) Clean and stow any other equipment used, including slings, utility chains or

snatch blocks. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for general cleaning instructions.

TA 092334

Change 1 2-99

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Crane Operation. The medium wrecker crane is capable of rotating 270 degrees.

The crane boom extends 18 feet (5.5 meters) and elevates to 45 degrees. Data plate (1)

above crane controls lists safe loads. Safe loads vary depending upon crane extension

and how crane operation is rigged. Maximum crane capacity is 20,000 pounds (9,080

kilograms) with three part line.

(I) Park wrecker on a level grade with hard surface if possible. Wrecker position

depends upon type of lifting operation such as rear lift, side lift, or lift and swing.

NOTE

Whenever possible, position

wrecker for a direct rear lift.

(2) Position outriggers (6). To position

outriggers:

(a) Remove pin holding L-shaped

retaining bolt (4) at corner of outrigger

frame tube (9) and remove bolt.

(b) Pull out outrigger (6) until frame

hits stop. Lower outrigger (6) to vertical

position.

(T)^_ , [^CRANECARACITY

2 RWTHOST UNE

(c) Direct crewmember to insert outrigger handle (8) stored in tool box into hole

of adjusting screw (5).

I

(d) With crewmember holding adjusting screw (5) in place, grasp outrigger base (7)

and turn counterclockwise until base (7) makes contact with ground.

(e) Turn adjusting screw (5) clockwise with outrigger handle (8) until base (7)

presses slightly against ground.

(f) Repeat procedure at other corners.

(3) Start engine.

(4) Pull out hand throttle control (11)

and set engine idle speed at 1,250

revolutions per minute as indicated by

tachometer (12).

(5) Place transfer case shift lever (17)

in neutral.

(6) Disengage parking brake lever (18)

and place brake lock switch (15) in LOCK

position.

(7) Place transmission shift lever (16)

in "1-5" (drive) position.

TA 092335

2-100 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(8) Unlock safety latch (20) and pull

transfer power takeoff lever ( 1 9) back to

engaged position.

(II) Adjust telescoping shipper braces

(10) as necessary to provide anticipated lift

height. To adjust shipper braces:

(a) Remove T-shaped retainer pins (3) from shipper brace assemblies (10). ■

(b) Raise boom to required height by pulling boom control lever (2) toward

operator. Adjust height slightly so that holes in male and female sections of shipper

brace assembly (10) line up.

NOTE

If more height is needed than full length of shipper braces allow, use

boom jacks. Refer to d(15) below for installation of boom jacks.

(c) Reinsert T-shaped retainer pins (3) in lined up holes.

(d) Lower boom slightly to remove load from crane hydraulic system.

WARNING

Direct all personnel to stand clear of crane or load during crane

operation. A snapped cable, shifting, or swinging load can be

extremely dangerous.

CAUTION

Do not unwind cable after hook has reached load. Continued

unwinding may loosen crane cable.

TA 092336

Change 1 2-101

TM 9-2320-272-10

(12) To lift load:

(a) Lower crane block (2) to load (4) by pushing hoist control lever (6) to DOWN

position (toward the boom). Return lever to neutral to stop lowering operation.

(h) Rig load with utility chains, cable slings, or attach hook (3) directly to lilting

devices on the load.

(c) Raise load by pulling hoist control lever (6) back to UP position. Stop raising

operation by returning lever (6) to neutral position.

(13) To lower load:

(a) Push hoist control lever (6) forward to DOWN position. Return lever (6) to

neutral when load is lowered.

BOOM HOIST crowt SWING

DOWN

1

DOWN EXTEND

t

IffT

1UP

tUP RETRACT RIGHT

Do not allow crane block (2) to jam boom sheaves (1) in raising

operation.

(b) Block load to prevent tipping or

shifting.

(14) To lift and swing load:

(a) Perform steps d(l) through d(10).

(b) Slightly pull boom control lever (5)

back to UP position to take boom weight

off shipper braces (1 1).

(c) Remove L-shaped retainer pin (10)

from shipper braces (11).

(d) Swing brace assemblies (11)

upward to brace retaining brackets (9) on

each side of shipper. Secure braces (11) on

brackets (9) with clips attached to brackets.

JUl

TA 090209

2-102

TM 9 2320-272-10

CAUTION

When extending boom, move

HOIST and CROWD levers

together.

(e) Extend boom (12) as necessary by

pushing crowd control lever (7) forward to

EXTEND position and hoist control lever

(6) forward to DOWN position. Maintain

an even distance between crane block (14)

and boom sheaves (13).

(f) Elevate boom (12) to desired height

by pulling boom control lever (5) back to

UP position.

(g) Raise load (4) as described in d(l2)

on page 2-102.

WARNING

Swing load slowly. A swinging

load can be extremely dangerous.

(h) Push swing control lever (8) forward to swing load to the left (LEFT position).

Pull swing control lever (8) back to swing load to the right (RIGHT position).

(i) Lower load as described in d(13).

(15) For heavy rear lift:

(a) Position wrecker on level, hard surface if possible.

(b) Position forward outriggers (15) located behind vehicle cab. Refer to cl(2) for

outrigger positioning instructions if necessary.

(c) Remove L-shaped retainer pin (10) from shipper braces (1 1).

(d) Swing shipper braces (11) upward

to brace retaining brackets (9) on each side 11

of shipper. Secure shipper braces (11) on

brackets (9) with clips attached to brackets. -

(e) Perform steps d(3) through d(9).

(f) Push boom control lever (5)

forward to DOWN to lower boom (12) to

horizontal position.

TA 090210

2-103

TM 9-2320-272-10

CAUTION

When extending boom, move

HOIST and CROWD levers

together.

(g) Extend boom (5) to desired

operational length by pushing crowd

control lever (3) forward to EXTEND

position and hoist control lever (2) forward

to DOWN position. Maintain even distance

between crane block (7) and boom sheaves

(6).

(h) Remove boom jacks (8) from storage on right wrecker bed.

(i) Remove jack pin (13) from left rear stowage compartment. Remove both

retaining pins (9). Insert jack pin (13) in hole at boom 12-foot (3.66 meter) mark (14).

(/) Insert boom jack yoke end (10) on jack pin (13). Secure with retaining pin (9).

(k) Remove ring-handled pin (12) and telescope boom jacks (8) to required length.

Reinsert ring handled pin (12) when required length is obtained. Secure with retaining

pin (9).

(I) Repeat procedures (/J and (k)on opposite side of boom with second boom jack (8).

TA 090211

2-104

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Direct all personnel to stand clear of crane.

(m) Pull boom control lever (1) back to UP position until boom jacks (8) are

raised off the ground.

(n) Remove boom jack base plates (4) located on each side of rear winch.

(o) Install boom jack (8) in base plate (4) and secure in place with pin (18) and

retaining pin (19).

(p) Install tie bar (16) between boom jacks (8) and secure in place with pin (15)

and retaining pin (17).

(q) Carefully push boom control lever (1) forward to DOWN position. Return

lever to neutral (stop) when boom jacks (8) make firm contact with ground.

(r) Proceed with lifting and lowering operation as described in d(I2) and d(13).

(16) Heavy side lifts are similar to heavy rear lifts except:

(a) Outriggers (20) on left side of

vehicle are positioned for heavy lifting from

left side of wrecker.

(b) Outriggers (20) on right side of

vehicle are positioned for heavy lifting from

right side of wrecker.

TA 092337

Change 1 2-105

TM 9-2320-272-10

e. Towing with Wrecker Crane. Organizational maintenance personnel must

accompany operator when retrieving vehicle with an automatic transmission. Operator

must not attempt to tow such vehicles until driveline of towed vehicle is disconnected

by organizational maintenance.

CAUTION

Do not use towing as a means to start engine of vehicle with

automatic transmission. Towing to start engines is an emergency

procedure used only on disabled vehicles with standard

transmissions. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled

vehicle will result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.

(1) Position rear of wrecker directly in front of disabled vehicle.

(2) If tires, transmission, and steering of disabled vehicles arc serviceable, install

towbar to front bumper shackle brackets (4) as presented in step (4).

(3) If disabled vehicle has no shackle brackets (4) or if tires, transmission, and/or

steering of disabled vehicle are unserviceable, use lift-tow procedures presented in

step (5).

-

(4) To tow direct using front bumper

shackle brackets of disabled vehicle:

(a) Remove both lifting shackles (3)

from front bumper of disabled vehicle and

store in a safe place.

(h) Install clevis end of towbar (2) to

front bumper shackle brackets (4) and

secure in place with clevis bolt (5) and

safety pin (1).

(c) Install yoke end of towbar to

wrecker pintle hook (7).

(d) Loosely install a utility chain (6) around disabled vehicle's front bumper and

bumperettes of wrecker.

(e) Disengage brakes and place transmission and transfer of disabled vehicle in

neutral.

CAUTION

If disabled vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission,

organizational maintenance must disconnect drive shaft before

towing. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled vehicle will

result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.

TA 092338

2-106 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(f) Reverse procedures (a) through (e) above after completion of towing operation.

(5) For lift-tow operations:

(a) Attach whiffletree (9) to lifting

shackles (3) of disabled vehicle.

(b) Lower crane block and hook (8)

and insert hook through center hole of

whiffletree (9). See d. Crane Operation.

(c) Remove towbar adjustment pins

(14) and slide out leg extensions (13).

(d) Attach clamps (12) to each leg

extension (13) and secure in place with

linking pin (16) and attached safety pin

(17).

(e) Loosen tension adjusting nut (11)

atop each clamp (12).

(f) Position clamp (12) against front axle (18) of disabled vehicle and wrap clamp

chain (10) around axle and back up through clamp. Lock in place by turning tension

adjusting nut (11) with wrench until securely tightened.

(g) Repeat step (f) above with second clamp in position against axle (18) on

opposite side of forward differential.

(h) After both clamps (12) are tightly secured to disabled vehicle, slide leg

extensions (13) back into towbar and secure in place with adjustment pins (14) and

retaining pins (15).

NOTE

If necessary, adjust length of tow bar while performing step (h) above.

Yoke end of towbar should extend one foot or more beyond front

bumper of disabled vehicle.

(i) Install yoke end of towbar to wrecker pintle hook (7).

(j) Disengage brakes and place transmission and transfer of disabled vehicle in

neUtral ~ CAUTION

If disabled vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission,

organizational maintenance must disconnect drive shaft before

towing. Damage to automatic transmission of disabled vehicle will

result from towing unless drive shaft is disconnected.

(k) Raise crane block and lift disabled vehicle front wheels off ground until towbar

is level (parallel to ground).

(I) Reverse procedures (a) through (k) above after completion of towing operation.

TA 092339

Change 1 2-107

TM 9-2320-272-10

/.' Securing Crane After Operation.

(1) Stow and secure outriggers (5).

boom jacks (4). tie bar (7). and boom jack

base plates (6) as applicable. Refer to

paragraph 2-2 1 d.

(2) Fully retract boom (2) into shipper

(3) and center boom to rear of wrecker.

NOTE

When retracting boom, pull

crowd control lever (20) back to

RETRACT position and HOIST

control lever (19) to UP position

to prevent block (8) from

becoming tangled.

(3) Remove retainer pin (9) from

upper retaining bracket (10) and swing

snipper brace (13) down to retaining

bracket (12) on wrecker body. Secure

shipper brace (13) in place with L-shaped

retaining pin (11).

(4) Slightly push boom control lever

(18) forward to DOWN position to allow

shipper braces (13) to support boom and

shipper weight.

(5) Install lifting sling (16) onto boom hook (15). Attach hook ends of sling (16) to

brackets (17) on outrigger frame tube.

(6) Pull hoist control lever (19) back to UP position to remove all slack from

lifting sling (16).

TA 090215

2-108

TM 9-2320-272-10

(7) Turn off floodlights (14) if used

during crane operation.

(8) Move transfer power takeoff

control lever (23) forward to DISENGAGE

position.

(9) Push in hand throttle control (25).


in "N" (neutral) position.

(11) Disengage brake lock switch (28)

and engage parking brake lever (22).

(12) Disengage amber warning light

(27) and floodlight control switch (26) if

used during crane operation.

(13) Place transfer shift lever (24) to

desired operating position.

26

TA 092340

Change 1 2-109

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-22. Operation of Dump Trucks.

a. Payload Capacities. M929 and M930 dump trucks can carry 10,000 pounds (4,540

kilograms) of material cross country and 20,000 pounds (9,080 kilograms) over paved

roads. Table 2-3 lists typical material weights.

Table 2-3. Typical Material Weights.

Capacity level Capacity heaping

full 5.0 cu-yd full 7.5 cu-yd

MATERIAL WEIGHT or 135 cu-ft or 202.5 cu-ft

Per cu-ft lb Per cu-yd lb lb (approx) lb (approx)

Ashes, soft coal 43 1,161 5,805 8,708

Cinders 46 1,242 6,210 9,315

Clay, dry loose 77 2,079 * 10,395 * 15,593

Clay, wet l 10 2,970 * 14.850 122,270

Clay and gravel, dry 1 00 2,700 * 13,500 +20,250

Clay and gravel, wet 65 1,755 8,774 * 13, 163

Coal, anthracite (hard) 54 1,458 7,290 * 10,935

Coal, bituminous (soft) 81 2,187 * 10,935 * 16,403

Coke 28 756 3,780 5,670

Concrete 138 3,726 * 18,630 +27,945

Concrete mix, wet 124 3,618 * 18,090 +27,135

Earth, dry loose 75 2,015 •10,125 •15,188

Earth, moist packed 95 2,565 *12,825 * 19,238

Earth and gravel, dry loose 100 2,700 * 13,500 120,250

Garbage, dry 37 999 4,995 7,493

Garbage, wet 47 1,269 6,345 9,518

Gravel 1 10 2,970 *14,850 +22,275

Gravel and sand, dry loose 95 2,565 * 12,825 * 19,238

Gravel and sand, wet 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300

Limestone, crushed 100 2,700 * 13,500 120,250

Mud, wet 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300

Rock and stone, crushed 95 2,565 *12,825 * 19,238

Salt, fine 50 1,350 6,750 * 10, 125

Sand, dry loose 98 2,646 * 13,230 * 19,845

Sand, dry packed 110 2,970 * 14,850 +22,275

Sand, moist loose 120 3,240 * 16,200 +24,300

Slag, crushed 75 2,025 *10,125 * 1 5, 1 88

Snow, moist packed 50 1,350 6,750 •10,125

Stone, crushed 100 2,700 * 13,500 +20,250

Stones, loose 95 2,565 * 12,825 * 19,238

♦Over rated cross-country payload. tOver rated cross-country and highway payload.

WARNING

Stay clear of dump body and cab protector at all times during

loading and unloading operations. Dump body can unexpectedly

raise when overloaded or when a heavy load is dropped into

dump body. This can result in serious injury. .

TA 090217

2-110

TM 9-2320-272-10

b. Regular Dump Operation.

(1) Position truck for dumping. Stop

| truck. Engage parking brake lever (4). Place

transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral)

position.

(2) Check tailgate chains (8) to make

sure chains will not restrict opening of

tailgate (9).

(3) Unlock tailgate (9) by pulling rod

(7) toward front of truck.

(4) Put transfer shift lever (3) down

into HIGH position.

(5) With brakes still engaged, place

transmission shift lever (1) in "1-5" (drive)

position.

(6) Pull transmission power takeoff

lever (2) back to ENGAGE position.

(7) Return transmission shift lever (1)

to "N" (neutral) position.

(8) Release lock (6) and pull dump

body control lever (5)back to RAISE

position (5c) to raise dump body.

NOTE

Dump body will stop automatical

ly when it is fully raised.

(9) To lower dump body, push dump body control lever (5) full forward to

LOWER position (5a).

(10) Return lever (5) to neutral position (5b) when dump body is completely

lowered. Secure lever with control lever lock (6).

CAUTION

It is very important that dump body control lever (5) remain locked in

neutral position (5b) when hoist is not being operated.

(11) Push transmission power takeoff control lever (2) forward to DISENGAGE

position.

(12) Push tailgate control rod hand lever (7) toward rear as far as it will go to lock

tailgate in closed position.TA 092341

Change 1 2-111

TM 9-2320-272-10

I

c. Rocker Type Dump Operation.

(1) Position truck for dumping. Stop truck. Engage parking brake lever (3). Place

transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral) position.

(2) Remove bracket pin (8) from upper hinged bracket (7) on left side of truck.

(3) Unfasten hook (6) and swing left tailgate wing (9) full to the rear.

(4) Reinsert left bracket pin (8) in

upper hinged bracket (7).

(5) Remove right bracket pin (11) from

upper hinged bracket (10) on right side of

truck.

(6) Unfasten retaining hooks (6) and

swing tailgate wings (9) and (12) full to the

rear.

NOTE

Do not reinsert right bracket pin

(11).

(7) Remove left bracket pin (8).

(8) Reinsert left and right bracket pins

(8) and (11) after tailgate has been lowered

into position.

(9) Perform steps b(4) through b(ll) on preceding page to raise and lower dump

body.

(10) After dump operation, remove

bracket pin (8) and raise tailgate ( 1 3).

Swing tailgate wings (9) and (12) to the side

and reinsert bracket pins (8) and (11).

(11) Secure tailgate wings (9) and (12)

to side of dump body with retaining hooks

(6).

TA 092342

2-112 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Spreader Type Dump Operation.

(1) Position truck for spreading. Stop

truck. Apply parking brake lever (3). Place

transmission (1) in "N" (neutral) position.

(2) Thread tailgate chain (14) through

chain brace (16) at corner of tailgate (15).

(3) Unfasten hook (17) from tailgate

wing (20) and swing wing (20) out of the

way of corner brace (18).

(4) Loop chain (14) under tailgate and

stuff chain end into corner brace (18).

When only needed length remains, insert

chain link into slot (19).

(5) Return tailgate wing (20) to side of

dump body and secure with retaining hook

(17).

(6) Repeat procedures on opposite side

of tailgate.

(7) Perform steps b(3) through b(7).

(8) Release lock (5) and pull dump

body control lever (4) back to RAISE

position (4b). When body has raised 2 or 3

feet (.6 to .9 meters), move dump control

lever (4) back to neutral position (4a) to

lock dump body in position.

(9) Pull transfer shift lever (2) up to

LOW position.

(10) Depress foot brake and disengage

parking brake lever (3).


in "1" (first gear) position.

(12) Disengage foot brake and

accelerate.

CAUTION

Do not exceed five miles per hour (8 kilometers) in "1" (first gear)

position. If more speed is required, refer to caution data plate (21) for

correct transmission gear range

21

(13) Raise dump at intervals by

moving dump body control lever (4) to

RAISE position (4b) and then back to

neutral position (4a) as required.

9;CAUTI0N! DONOTEXCEED!^MAXIMUM ROAD SPEED IN MP.H

TRANSMISSION T%"

FIFTHFOURTHTHIRD

IL REVERSE 5*DONOT USE REVERSE INL£WTRANSFER

TA 090220

2-113

TM 9-2320-272-10

(14) After material has been unloaded:

| (a) Stop truck. Engage parking brake lever (4).

(b) Place transmission shift lever (1) in "N" (neutral).

(c) Push transfer shift lever (3) down to HIGH position.

(d) Pull dump body control lever (5) forward to LOWER position (7).

(e) Return dump body control lever (5)

to neutral and secure lever in neutral with

lock (6).

(f) Push transmission power takeoff

control lever (2) forward to DISENGAGE

position.

(g) Push tailgate control rod hand

lever (8) up and back as far as it will go to

lock tailgate in closed position.

2-114 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-23. Operation of Tractor and Fifth Wheel.

a. General. A fifth wheel, or semitrailer coupler, is mounted on the rear of M931 and

M932 tractor trucks. When connected to a semitrailer, the fifth wheel pivots up. down

and sideways to allow for changes in the road. The fifth wheel is rated at 55,000' pounds

(24,970 kilograms) on the highway and 37,500 pounds (17,025 kilograms) cross country.

b. Wedge Adjustment.

(1) Position fifth wheel wedges (10)

fully beneath walking beam (9) for on-

highway operations.

(2) Position wedges (10) back and

away from walking beam (9) for off-the-

road operations.

(3) To position wedges:

(a) Loosen capscrews (11) in slot in the

center of each wedge.

(b) Slide wedge (10) into proper

position.

TA 092344

Change 1 2-115

TM 9-2320-272-10

c. Coupling Semitrailer.

WARNING

Do not back up without a ground

guide.

(1) Back up tractor so fifth wheel

coupler jaws (9) are directly centered and in

line with semitrailer kingpin (3).

(2) Stop vehicle in front of semitrailer,

place transmission shift lever (6) in "N"

(neutral) position and engage parking brake

lever (7).

(3) Turn landing gear crank (4) to

adjust semitrailer height to tractor.

Semitrailer approach plates (2) should be

slightly lower than tractor fifth wheel (1).

(4) Block semitrailer wheels with

chocks (5) stored on underbody of

semitrailer.

(5) Pull plunger lever (8) up and out to

open fifth wheel coupling jaws (9).

NOTE

When backing up, maintain

centerline of tractor with

centerline of semitrailer.

TA 092345

2-116 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(6) Disengage parking brake lever (7) and slowly back tractor under semitrailer.

Stop vehicle when semitrailer king pin (3) connects with fifth wheel coupling jaws (9).

Place transmission shift lever (6) in "N" (neutral) and engage parking brake lever (7).

(7) Connect tractor air coupling (10) to air couplings of semitrailer (11).

CAUTION

Do not cross air coupling hoses (12). Do not allow hoses (12) to

contact surface of tractor fifth wheel (1). Hoses may tangle if

crossed or become damaged during coupling operation if in

contact with fifth wheel surface.

NOTE

Airbrake hose shutoff cock levers (13) must be open at all times

during normal operation of tractor truck. Visually check each

shutoff cock lever (13) at base of airlines. Cock lever (13) should

be in the down (open) position (13b). Open cocks if lever (13) is

in the up (closed) position (13a).

TA 090224

2-117

TM 9-2320-272-10

(8) Press in trailer air supply valve (3)

and hold in place for fifteen seconds.

Release valve (3). Valve should remain in

engaged position indicating semitrailer

airbrake system has proper air pressure.

WARNING

(9) Pull down trailer air brake hand

control (2) to engage semitrailer brakes.

| (10) Disengage tractor parking brake

lever (6), place transmission shift lever (5)

in "R" (reverse) position and resume

backing up.

(11) Stop vehicle when tractor

coupling jaws (7) close around semitrailer

kingpin (8). Visually check to make sure

jaws (7) have completely closed.

(12) With trailer airbrake control

handle (2) engaged, place transmission shift

lever (5) in "1" (first) gear position and

slightly depress accelerator pedal. Tractor

will not move forward if fifth wheel is

properly connected to semitrailer.

CAUTION

Stop vehicle immediately and

repeat steps c(9) through c(12) if

tractor moves forward.

Do not continue with coupling

operation if trailer air supply

valve (3) fails to engage.

Disconnect air couplings (9) and

notify organizational mainte

nance.

TA 092346

2-118 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(13) Place transmission shift lever (5) in "N" (neutral) position and apply

handbrake (6).

(14) Connect electrical cable (11) to electric receptacle (10) on, semitrailer.

(15) Check semitrailer lights:

(a) Turn main switch (1) to STOP turn position or SERVICE drive.

(b) Operate turn signal switch (4) and direct ground guide to check for proper

operation of semitrailer stoplights.

(c) Depress brake pedal and direct ground guide to check for proper operation

of semitrailer stoplights.

(16) Turn crank (12) to raise landing

gear (14) on semitrailer.

(17) Stow landing gear tloat pads (15)

in racks (13) and remove wheel chocks (16).

d. Uncoupling Semitrailer.

WARNING

Use ground guide when backing

up to park semitrailer.

(I) Park semitrailer in proper location, engage semitrailer airbrake control lever (2)

and tractor parking brake lever (6).

(2) Place chock blocks (16) in front of

and behind semitrailer wheels.

(3) Place landing gear float pads (15)

on ground beneath semitrailer landing legs.

(4) Turn crank (12) until landing legs

(14) make firm contact with float pads (15).

TA 090226

2-1 19

TM 9-2320-272-10

(5) Disconnect and remove electrical

cable (2) from semitrailer. Secure cable (2)

on tractor.

(6) Disconnect and remove air

couplings (1) from semitrailer. Secure

airhose and couplings on tractor.

vehicle cab will automatically pop

back and disengage when air

couplings (1) are disconnected.

(7) Pull plunger lever (5) up and out to open fifth wheel coupling jaws (4) This

will release semitrailer kingpin (6). 6J y h

(8) Move tractor forward until fifth wheel (8) and approach plate ramps (7) are

clear of semitrailer. F '

TA 092347

2-120 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

TA 092348

Change 1 2-121

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-24. Operation of Expansible Van Trucks.

I a. General. Expansible van trucks transport communication equipment into the field.

Van bodies are 8 feet (2.4 meters) wide in travel position. In the field, van sides expand

to nearly 14 feet (4.3 meters).

b. Selecting Operating Site. Whenever possible, position van on level, firm ground.

WARNING

Block vehicle wheels if operating site is on a grade, no matter how slight.

c. Leveling Van Body.

(1) Remove four adjustable leveling

jacks (4) and foot pads (5) from stowage

compartment on rear of van body.

(2) Attach foot pad (5) to bottom of

each jack (4). Assemble and install inner

and outer tubes of jack and adjust jack

length to approximate height of brackets

(1) (marked H) at each corner of van.

Secure jack (4) with chained pin (7).

1(3) Insert upper foot (2) of jack (4) into bracket (1). Install jack handle (3) and

unscrew jack until foot pads (5) are in firm contact with ground. Anchor each jack foot

pad (5) with two jack spikes (6).

(4) Repeat procedure at each corner of van until body is level.

NOTE

Do not attempt to jack entire van clear of ground with levelingjacks.

d. Power Lift Gate Operation. Power lift gate on M935 models must be lowered

before van body can be expanded.

(1) Remove ladders (10) from lift gate:

(a) Remove eyebolts (11) securing ladders (10) to lift gate.

NOTE


(b) Lift ladders (10) off of ladder hooks (9) and lower ladders.

(2) Prepare for power lift gate operation:

TA 092349

I

2-122 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(a) Start engine.

(b) Pull out hand throttle control (17)

and set engine idle speed at 1,000 to 1,200

revolutions per minute as indicated by

tachometer (18).

(c) Place transfer case shift lever (16)

in neutral.

(d) Place transmission shift lever (14)

in "1-5" (drive) position.

(e) Pull transmission power takeoff

lever (15) back to ENGAGE position.

(h) To lower power lift gate (8),

remove lever extension from cab stowage

and install on lowering and elevating

control lever (13) at van rear. Move lever

(13) momentarily toward front of vehicle to

release safety lock, then toward rear of

vehicle. Lift gate will stop automatically at

ground level.

(3) Push transmission power takeoff

lever (15) forward to DISENGAGE

position

(4) Stop engine.

(f) Return transmission shift lever (14)

to "N" (neutral).

(g) To open power lift gate (8), move

opening and closing control lever (12) at

van rear toward rear of vehicle. Lift gate

will stop automatically when fully open.

TA 097350

Change 1 2-123

TM 9-2320-272-10

I

e. Expanding Van Body.

(1) On M934 model vans without

power lift gate:

(a) Release toggle clamp (2) securing

right ladder (1).

NOTE

• This operation requires two

crewmembers.

Vans with power lift gate must

lower gate before expanding van

sides. Refer to d for lift gate


(b) Lift ladder (1) up and out to remove

ladders from rear door ladder mounting racks.

(c) Install ladder (1) in brackets beneath

right rear door.

(2) Remove chain pin (8) from lock

handle assembly (9). Pull handle (9) out

and disengage handle end from retaining

bracket (7). Repeat procedure at all four

van corners.

(3) Remove side panel lock wrench (1 1)

and ratchet wrench '(5) from holders inside left

rear door.

(4) Turn four side locks (10) one quarter

turn counterclockwise with side panel lock

wrench (1 1).

I

(5) Push locking plunger (3) downward

to release ratchet (4).

2 ^ 1\i \j

■

\l *"

1/: ic

;—(fy—il V ' J ° * • •

TA 092351

2-124 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(6) With ratchet wrench (5) turn left ratchet (4) counterclockwise to expand left

side panel (13). Turn right ratchet (6) clockwise to expand right side panel (14). Crank

both sides fully out.

(7) Unfold four end panels (15). Unclip and use holding rod (17) to keep end panel

door open and out of the way while roof (16) and floor panels (18) are being raised and

lowered.

WARNING

Do not open hinged roof (16)

and floor panel (18) from

outside the van. Push open roof

and floor panel from inside van

only.

(8) Turn hinged roof lock handle (12)

counterclockwise to release panel locks.

(9) From inside van, push hinged roof (16) and floor panel (18) outward. Step out

onto floor panel (18) and lift roof panel (16) until panels are fully open.

TA 090232

2-125

TM 9-2320-272-10

(11) Slide end panel bolt (6) into

corner post guide (8).

(12) Crank both sides in with ratchet

wrench until toggle clamps (1) on van roof

can be attached to swivel hooks (2). Left

ratchet (13) is turned clockwise to retract

left side of van. Right ratchet (14) is turned

counterclockwise to retract right side of

van.

(13) Pull side panel (4) straight by

partially closing clamps (1). While doing

this, push up on hinged roof (3) and out on

end panels (5) to insure seal alinement.

(14) Tramp heavily on hinged floor

panel (7) to relieve any binding.

(15) Apply force to left and right

ratchet cranking mechanisms (13) and (14)

to insure a tight seal.

©9r

(16) Remove sidq lock rod (10) from

retaining clip. Swing rod (10) down and

engage end of rod (9) with lock handle

assembly (11). Push assembly closed and

secure with chained pin (12). Repeat

procedure at all four van corners.

(17) Close three toggle clamps (1) on

each side, closing center clamp first.

NOTE

Make sure sliding end panel bolts

(6) are fully extended into corner

post guides (8).

TA 090233

2-126

TM 9-2320-272-10

(18) Complete van set-up as applicable:

(a) Mount ladders (18) to rear and/or side doors.

WARNING

Ground spike (20) must be driven into ground 18 to 24 inches (46

to 61 centimeters) and spike cable (25) connected to the chassis

(23) before power can be taken from outside source.

(b) Remove ground spike (20) from storage box (19).

WARNING

Make certain spike cable ring terminal (22) makes good contact with

bare metal. If necessary, scrape clean contact area of dirt, paint, or

rust.

(c) Remove bolt (21) and connect spike cable ring terminal (22) to chassis behind

left-rear stoplight (24).

(d) Drive ground spike (20) 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 centimeters) into ground.

(e) Remove power cable (16) from power cable reel (17).

(f) Connect power cable (16) to appropriate auxiliary power source.

(g) Connect other end of power cable (16) to van power entrance receptacle (15).

TA 090234

2-127

TM 9-2320-272-10

/ Operating Van Electrical System.

CAUTION

I

If auxiliary power source is an alternating electric current (AC), turn

on power converter switch (3) before opening main circuit breaker

switches (switches 22, 23, and 24).

(1) Turn on main switches (switches 22, 23, 24) to open switch box (1) to current

from outside power source.

(2) Turn on ceiling light switch (switch 14).

(3) Turn on receptacle switches (switches 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13).

(4) Turn on switch 5 if left heater (6) is to be used. Turn on switch 8 if right heater

(8) is to be used. Refer to g for left and right heater operating instructions.

(5) Turn on switches 16, 17, and 18 if air conditioning unit (7) is to be used. Refer

to h for air conditioner operating instructions.

(6) Turn on switch 2 if blackout switch (4) is to be used. Refer to j for blackout


(?) Tur".°n_emergency light switch W if outside power source fails

TA 092352

2-128 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

g. Operating Van Heaters.

WARNING

Ground spike (10) must be

driven into ground 18 to 24

inches (46 to 61 centimeters) and

spike cable (11) connected to the

chassis (9) before electric power

can be taken from outside

source.

(I) Turn on main circuit breaker switches (switches 22, 23 and 24) in circuit

breaker switch box (1).

(2) Turn on left heater switch (switch 5) and/or right heater switch (switch 8) in

circuit breaker switch box (1).

(3) Set heater thermostat (2) to desired

temperature.

(4) Set heater switch (13) to HEAT

(for heated air) or FAN (for unheated air)

as desired. White indicator light (14) should

come on when heater is working properly.

(5) Set louver operating handles (12)

to control mix of outside air with

recirculated air.

(a) On left side heater, pull louver

handle (12) out to recirculate air, in to

admit outside air.

(b) On right side heater pull louver

handle (12) in to recirculate air, out to

admit outside air.

(6) Open heat registers (15) below

heaters.

(7) To stop heaters, turn off heater

control switch (13).

CAUTION

Do not turn off heater circuit

breaker switches (switches 5 and

8) until white indicator light (14)

goes off.

TA 090236

2-129

TM 9-2320-272-10

h. Operating Van Air Conditioner.

(I) Push bonnet door control rod (12)

forward to open bonnet door (14).

WARNING

Ground spike (3) must be driven

into ground 18 to 24 inches (46

to 61 centimeters) and spike

cable (2) connected to chassis (1)

before power can be taken from

outside source.

(2) Turn on main circuit breaker

switches (switches 22, 23, and 24) in circuit

breaker switch box (4).

(3) Turn on air conditioner switches

(switches 16, 17. and 18) in circuit breaker

switch box (4).

(4) Turn on power input switch (6)

and compressor circuit breaker (7).

(5) Set air conditioner control knob (8)

to COOL for cold air or VENT for

ventillation of outside air into van.

TA 090237

2-130

TM 9-2320-272-10

(7) Adjust temperature selector knob (10). Cooler temperatures are obtained when

temperature selector knob (10) is turned counterclockwise.

(8) Open air conditioner vents (1 1).

(9) To shut off air conditioner:

(a) Turn air conditioner control knob

(8) to VENT.

(b) Turn compressor circuit breaker (7)

to OFF.

(c) Turn power input switch (6) to

OFF.

(d) Turn off air conditioner switches

(switches 16, 17, and 18) in circuit breaker

switch box (4).

(e) Pull bonnet door control rod (12) back to close bonnet door (14).

i. Blackout Operations.

(I) Push up blackout panels (15) on

van sides and rear doors to block in all

interior light.

WARNING

Ground spike (3) must be driven

into ground 18 to 24 inches (46

to 61 centimeters) and spike

cable (2) connected to chassis (1)

before power can be taken from

outside source.

(2) Turn on blackout circuit switch (switch 2) in circuit breaker box (4).

(3) Turn on main circuit breaker switches (switches 22, 23. and 24) in circuit

breaker box (4).

(4) Turn on blackout switch (5). Ceiling lights (13) will now cutoff automatically

when van door is opened.

TA 090238

2-131

TM 9-2320-272-10

(5) Turn overhead receptacle switches (4) to ON position.

NOTE

Leave switches (4) servicing machines that must operate without

interruption during blackout conditions in OFF positions. Lights

to operate these machines should be plugged into a separate

overhead receptacle with blackout switch in ON position.

(6) After blackout operation:

(a) Turn all overhead receptacle blackout switches to OFF.

(b) Turn off main blackout switch (5).

(c) Turn off blackout circuit breaker switch (switch 2) in circuit breaker box (2).

(I) Use inside van switch (8) to open-.te lift pate when vehicle is connected to an

external power source.

CAUTION

Do not use inside van switch when power takeoff is engaged.

(a) Upper button (7) elevates hydraulic lift.

(b) Lower button (6) lowers hydraulic lift.

(2) Use power lift gate operation procedures outlined in d when external power is

not available.

TA 090239

2-132

TM 9-2320-272-10

CAUTION

• Do not elevate lift gate to closed position when rear doors are

open. Do not carry load on lift gate when vehicle is in motion.

• Do not overload lift gate. Distribute load evenly. Maximum

load is 3,000 pounds (136.2 kilograms).

k. Retracting Van Body.

(1) Turn off van machines.

(2) Remove and stow all gear and

equipment from expanded sections of van

floor.

(3) Close and secure all windows and

side doors.

(4) Turn off all switches (switches 1

through 24) in circuit breaker box (2).

(5) Turn off power convenor switch

(3) if used during operation.

(6) Retract four end sliding bolts (1).

®

(7) Release and unhook six toggle

clamps (9). Do not place swivel hooks (10)

in stowed position.

(8) Remove field telephone lead-in

(11).

(9) Remove power cable (12), rewind

on power cable reel (13), and cover with

canvas cover.

(10) Remove ground spike and cable

(15). Stow in storage box (14).

TA 090240

2-133

TM 9-2320-272-10

(11) Disengage side lock rods (3) at all

four corners from lock handle assemblies

(5) and place rods (3) in retaining clips (4).

(12) Push locking plunger (1)

downward to release ratchet (2).

(13) With ratchet wrench (6) turn left

ratchet (2) counterclockwise to retract left

side panel. Turn right ratchet counter

clockwise to retract right side panel. Crank

both sides until fully retracted.

NOTE

When hinged roof panel (7) is

being lowered, hinged floor

panel (10) will swing up.

(16) Engage eye of each toggle clamp

(12) with anchor post (13) in stored

position and close clamp (12).

(14) Push up on hinged roof (7) to free

end panels (8). Push out on end panels (8)

and hold panels open and out of the way

with holding rod (9).

(15)- Push up on hinged roof (7) and

swing swivel hooks (14) into stored

position. Lower roof (7).

TA 092353

2-134 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(17) From outside the van, push in to

fully close hinged floor and roof panels

(16). Turn lock handle (17) clockwise to

lock floor and roof panels in closed

position.

(18) Remove holding rods (9) from

end panels (8) and reinsert each rod into

retaining clips on beam.

(19) Close end panels (8) at all corners.

(20) Crank side panels (15) to fully

closed position by turning left ratchet (2)

clockwise and right ratchet (6)

counterclockwise.

(22) Insert end of lock handle

assembly (22) into lock rod brace (20).

Close lock handle assembly (22) and secure

in place with chain pin (21).

(21) Turn four side locks (18) one

quarter turn clockwise with side panel lock

wrench (19).

(23) Remove stabilizer eye bolt (11)

and slide telescoped parts upward into main

stabilizer tube. Reinsert eyebolt (11).

(24) Swing hinged stabilizer (24)

upward and secure beneath van body with

retaining screw (23).

(25) Repeat procedures (23) and (24)

with remaining van stabilizers.

TA 090242

2-135

TM 9-2320-272-10

(26) Stow all tools and equipment used

during van operation.

(27) Close and secure rear doors.

(28) On models without lift gate,

install ladders (1) to rear doors and secure

for travel with toggle clamps (2).

(29) On models with lift gate, elevate

and close lift gate (3), then install ladders

(1). If necessary, refer to t/for lift gate

operating instructions using exterior

controls (5).

(30) Secure lower end of ladders (1) to

lift gate (3) with bolts (4).

2-136

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-25. Operation of Auxiliary Equipment (Special Purpose Kits).

a. General. Special purpose kits for M939 series vehicles are listed in table 2-4.

Table 2-4. M939 Series Special Purpose Kits.

KITSM9M

M9292 M929 M926

M9M

M928 M929 M990 M991

M9M

M9992

M9M

M996

A-frame X X X X X

Airbrake Kit X X X X X X X X X

Arctic Winterization* X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Arctic Cargo Body X X X X X X

Bow and Tarp X X X X X X X X

Electric Brake Kit X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Deep Water Fording X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Machine Gun Mount X X X X X X X X X

Rifle Mount X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Troopseat & Paulin X X

Chemical Agent Alarm X X X X X X X X X X X X X

* Winterization kit includes engine coolant heater, personnel heater, hardtop closure and

thermal barriers.

b. Operating Instructions. Operating instructions for the following special purpose

kits are covered herein.

(1) Deep Water Fording Kit

(2) Troopseat Kit

(3) Bow and Tarp Kit

(4) Arctic Winterization Kit

(5) A-frame Kit

(6) Electric Brake Kit

(7) Airbrake Control Kit

TA 090244

2-137

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-26. Deep Water Fording Kit.

I

I

a. General. The deep water fording kit allows M939 series vehicles to cross through

water up to 78 inches (198 centimeters) deep.

CAUTION

Never attempt deep water fording unless water depth is known to

be 78 inches (198 centimeters) or less, and bottom surface is

known to be hard.

b. Operator Preparation for Fording.

(1) Tighten fuel tank cap (3).

(2) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.

(3) Remove flywheel housing drain plug (2) from storage boss. Install plug (2) in

flywheel drain port (1).

TA 092354

2-138

Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Make sure battery caps (4) are all

present and tight. Make sure transmission

dipstick (5) is secured tightly.

c. Fording Operation.

(1) Start Vehicle. Make sure engine is

running properly. Refer to paragraph 2-1 1,

k and / for proper starting and engine


(2) Pull transfer shift lever (7) up to

LOW position and place transmission shift

lever (6) in "1" (first) gear.

WARNING

Do not attempt to cross water

deeper than 78 inches (198

centimeters). Limit vehicle speed

while fording to 3 or 4 miles per

hour (4.8 to 6.4 kilometers per

hour).

(3) Enter water slowly. Pull out

fording control handle (8) immediately

upon entering water.

(4) Maintain even vehicle speed while

fording, and exit water in area with gentle

slope.

(5) Push in fording control handle (8)

immediately upon leaving water.

Change 1 2-139

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying

brakes until uneven braking ceases.

d. After Fording Operation.

(I) Remove flywheel housing drain

plug (3) from drain port (1). Install plug (3)

in storage boss (2).

NOTE

Vehicles completing a deep water fording operation must be serviced

by organizational maintenance as soon as possible.

TA 090247

2-140

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-27. Troopseat Kit.

a. General. Troop seat kit is used to convert M929 and M930 dump trucks into

troop carriers. Troop seat kit also enables dump trucks to transport bulk cargo that

would otherwise extend above dump body.

b. Troopseat Kit Installation.

(I) Insert side racks (4) into slots (5) on dump body side walls.

(2) Fold out troopseat support legs (9). Lay troopseat (8) flat on bed of dump

body.

NOTE


(3) Raise troopseat (8) level with slots (6) on dump body sides. Insert troopseat

engaging hooks (7) into slots, fold support legs (9) inward and lower troopseat into

position.

(4) Adjust each troopseat support leg

(9) until all supports evenly contact the side

and floor of the truck.

(5) Secure safety strap (11) to eyelets

(10) on side rack ends.

TA 090248

2-141

TM 9-2320-272-10

I

(6) Install bows, end curtain, and tarpaulin top. Refer to following paragraph 2-28

for bow and tarp kit installation.

CAUTION

Troopseat kit for dump trucks must be removed and stowed off

vehicle when dump truck is used for dumping operations.

2-28. Bow and Tarp Kit.

a. Bow and Tarp Kit Installation.

(1) Insert staves (I) into side rack

sockets (4).

(2) Insert overhead cross bows (3) into

staves (I). Secure each end of overhead

cross bows (3) in place with stave latches

(2).

NOTE

Some overhead cross bows secure

in place with screws and washers

instead of latches.

(3) Thread two lashing ropes (7) into center eyelets of forward end curtain (9).

Place forward end curtain in position and wind ropes (7) alternately around overhead

bow (8) and through eyelets.

TA 092356

2-142 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Secure rope end on each side of vehicle to lashing hooks (10).

(5) Secure personnel safety strap (5) to eyelets (6) on side rails nearest tailgate.

(6) Repeat procedure with rear end curtain. Do not tie down bottom of rear end

curtain until bow and tarp installation is completed.

NOTE

Do not tie down bottom of rear end curtain when transporting troops.

TA 092357

Change 1 2-143

TM 9-2320-272-10

(7) Install paulin top as follows:

(a) Place folded paulin (1) across top

center bow with half marked FRONT

facing front of truck.

(b) Unfold front of paulin (1) over

bows (2) all the way. Now unfold other end

of paulin top toward rear of truck.

(c) Unfold one side of paulin (1), then

unfold other side toward sides of truck.

Allow loose paulin sides to drape over side

of truck.

(d) Tighten lashing ropes (3) to lashing

hooks (4) on each side of truck.

NOTE

Ropes should be snug, but not too tight.

TA 090251

2-144I

TM 9-2320-272-10

h. Raising Paulin for Ventilation.

NOTE

This operation requires two or

three erewmembers.

(1) Remove rear paulin end curtain

(5), if installed.

(2) Untie all paulin lashing ropes (3).

c. How and Tarp Kit Removal.

NOTE

Do not fold or stow paulin when

wet.

(1) Remove paulin top (I) from truck

and lay paulin flat on ground, with buckles

(9) on top.

(3) Fold up paulin (1) into three to

five folds until straps (6) attached to staves

are exposed.

(4) Fasten folded paulin in place using

straps (6) and buckles (7) attached to

outside of paulin.

(5) Tie front and rear lashing ropes to

end staves (8).

TA 090252

2-145

TM 9-2320-272-10

(2) Fold eyelet side of paulin (1) to

first row of buckles.

(3) Fold paulin (1) over again, and

then one more time.

(4) Fold other side of paulin (1) once,

to the row of buckles.

(5) Then fold paulin (1) again, until

the two folds meet.

(6) Now fold the side with three folds

over the side with four folds.

(7) Next fold paulin (1) end halfway to

the first seam, and then over again, until

inner edge of paulin is at middle.

TA 090253

2-146

TM 9-2320-272-10

(8) Repeat folding on opposite paulin

(1) end until both folded ends meet.

(9) Place folded paulin (I) front end

up and with chalk, mark FRONT. Make

sure that letters are big enough to see.

(10) Turn folded paulin (1) over and

mark REAR.

(11) Remove end curtains (2) and fold

them to approximately the same dimensions

as the paulin.

(12) Place paulin (I) and end curtains

(2) on a pallet for storage.

(13) Unlatch and remove overhead

cross bows (5) from staves.

(14) Remove staves (4) from side rack

sockets (3).

TA 090254

2-147

TM 9-2320-272-10

(15) Stow staves (2) in pockets (3) on forward end of truck sides. On M923 and

M925 models, staves are stored in pockets on cargo body directly behind vehicle cab

(1).

TA 090256

2-148

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-29. Arctic Winterization Kit.

a. General. Arctic winterization kits are installed by direct support maintenance

personnel on vehicles operating in -25° F to -65° F (-31°C to -53°C) temperatures or

less. The kit includes hardtop enclosure (5), quilted engine compartment cover (6), fuel

burning personnel heater and fuel burning engine coolant heater. Hardtop enclosure (5)

is also installed as a separate kit on vehicles operating in cold weather -25° F (-31°C)

and below.

b. Operating Engine Compartment

Covers.

(!) Start engine with radiator

winterfront cover flap (7) closed. Refer to

paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting

instruction.

(2) Roll up and secure radiator cover

flap (8) in open position when engine

temperature rises above 180°F(82°C) as

indicated by temperature gage (8) on

instrument panel.

(3) If engine temperature should

exceed 190°F (87°C). completely remove

engine compartment cover (6) to avoid

overheating.

(4) Open and close cover flap (7) as

required during arctic operations to

maintain engine temperature within normal

operating range of 165°F to 195°F (79°C

to 90°C).

TA 092358

Change 1 2-149

TM 9-2320-272-10

c. Operating Fuel Burning Personnel Heater. Fuel burning personnel heater provides

heat and defrost to vehicle cab when the engine is operating.

(I) Shut off engine coolant heater if it is in operation. Refer to d(9) for engine

coolant heater shut down instructions.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine coolant heater control box (4) and

personnel heater control box (5) at the same time.

JJ IL

w

I

(2) Open electric fuel pump shutoff

valve by turning valve lever (10) one-

quarter turn counterclockwise.

(3) Start vehicle engine. Refer to

paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting


(4) Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button

(7) on personnel heater control box (5) to

check operation of circuit. Observe that

indicator lamp (7) lights up.

(5) Set HI-LO switch (6) on personnel

heater control box (5) to HI.

(6) Set RUN-OFF-START switch (8) to START position until indicator lamp (7)

glows. Switch (8) is spring loaded in START position and must be held down.

NOTE

Heater will not operate if switch (8) is moved to RUN position before

indicator lamp lights up.

TA 092359

2-150 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(7) As soon as indicator lamp (7) lights, turn switch (8) from START position to

RUN position without hesitating at OFF.

NOTE

If heater fails to start, turn switch to OFF position and repeat

steps (5) and (I). Notify organizational maintenance if heater fails

to start after two attempts.

NOTE

Heater blower motor switch (1) on vehicle instrument panel is

not turned on. Blower motor switch (1) is replaced in arctic

winterization kit by HI-LO switch (6) and RUN-OFF-START

switch (8).

(8) Adjust hot air flow with heat vent control handle (3).

CAUTION

Heat cab before defrosting windshield. Glass damage may result

from sudden temperature changes.

(9) Adjust defroster control handle (2) as required to defrost windshield. All

heated air is directed at windshield when defroster control handle (2) is pulled all the

way out.

(10) To shut down personnel heater:

(a) Turn RUN-OFF-START switch (8) to OFF position.

(b) Remain in vehicle cab to make sure indicator lamp (7) goes out and blower

motor stops.

(c) Close defroster control handle (2) and heat vent control handle (3).

(d) Shut off vehicle engine. Refer to paragraph 2-14 for engine shut off


(e) Close electric fuel pump shutoff valve (9) by turning valve lever (10) one-

quarter turn clockwise.

NOTE

Do not turn battery switch to OFF or close electric fuel pump shutoff

valve ( 1 0) if fuel burning engine coolant heater is to be operated while

vehicle engine is off.

TA 090259

2-151

TM 9-2320-272-10

J. Operating Engine Coolant Heater. Engine heater is not designed for use while

vehicle engine is operating. This heater preheats engine coolant in preparation for

starting at extremely low temperatures or to maintain engine in standby readiness.

CAUTION

Coolant shutoff cocks (1) and (2) on engine coolant heater

should remain open at all times in arctic conditions.

WARNING

Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in

closed area occupied hy personnel.

(1) Open heater fuel shutoff valve (3) by turning valve lever (4) one-quarter turn

counterclockwise. Heater (5) is located in tool box on right side of vehicle.

(2) Open electric fuel pump shutoff

valve located near air cleaner assembly (7)

by turning valve lever (6) one-quarter turn

counterclockwise.

TA 092360

2-152 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(3) Turn battery switch lever (8) to ON position.

(4) Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button (11) on engine heater control box (9) to

check operation of circuit. Observe that indicator lamp (11) lights up.

(5) Set Hl-LO switch (10) on engine heater control box to HI or LO position.

NOTE

Select HI position if engine is cold. Select LO position if engine

is already well heated. Switch (10) will automatically change to

LO position when coolant temperature exceeds 195°F (90°C).

Switch (10) will automatically change to HI position when

coolant temperature drops below 120°F (48°C).

(6) Set RUN-OFF-START switch (12) on engine heater control box (9) to

START position. HOLD in START position until indicator lamp glows. Switch (12) is

spring loaded in START position and must be held down.

NOTE

Heater will not operate if switch (12) is moved to RUN position

before indicator lamp lights up.

(7) As soon as indicator lamp (11) lights, turn switch (12) from START position

to RUN position without hesitating at OFF.

TA 090261

2-153

TM 9-2320-272-10

NOTE

If engine coolant heater fails to start, turn switch to OFF

position and repeat steps (5) and (6). Notify organizational

maintenance if heater fails to start after two attempts.

(8) Check fuel gage (2). Make sure fuel tank(s) are full if engine coolant heater is

to operate for an extended period.

(9) To shut down engine coolant

heater:

(a) Turn RUN-OFF-START switch (4)

to OFF position.

(b) Remain in vehicle cab to make

sure indicator lamp (3) goes out and blower

motor shuts down (approximately 1-3

minutes).

(c) Turn battery switch lever (1) to

OFF position after indicator lamp (3) goes

out and blower motor stops.

ENGINE HEATER

2-154

Oi-ZLZ-OZZZbWl

39S060VI

Apatideiuiuipndeut'tsOqotsiepiqeAfi(p)dun)c)sptcstimO

310N

-asi/VVôo|OUrni.iounnb-auo)/')rOAO|OAp?vguiurniAqoA|BAyoinqspnfreiKheeso|j)a)

seiun\\v.\v,uopouibmreismu)9)s>pooyoinqs

iui?jooodepnqs-j||«suoiatJepoeiprnSuunQdepnqs-j^run

s>pooiiotnqstur|ooony'(/.)J3A9]e.qn.v|foinqspnjrbeudeinoo|

)6)>pooyotnqsiu»?|oooesop/q|niuedpcB01iouearee)|aL

Nounvo

SSl-2

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-30. A-frame Kit.

a. General. The A-frame kit is installed on vehicles with front winches to provide a

means for lifting, moving, and lowering material when standard cranes are not

available. A-frame load capacity is 3,000 pounds (1,362 kilograms).

NOTE

A-frame kit is installed and rigged by organizational maintenance

personnel.

WARNING

Vehicle will become charged with electricity if A-frame contacts

or breaks high voltage wire. Do not leave vehicle while high

voltage line is in contact with A-frame or vehicle. Serious

personal injury can result. Signal nearby personnel to have

electrical power turned off.

(1) Maneuver vehicle into position for operation. Be careful that A-frame does not

come into contact with wires, cables, tree limbs or other overhead obstructions.

(2) Park vehicle and set handbrake.

e. Operating A-frame. Operate front winch to raise, lower or hold load. Refer to

paragraph 2-19 for front winch operating instructions.

CAUTION

• Do not attempt to lift more than 3,000 pounds ( 1362 kilograms)

with A-frame kit.

• Do not allow cable chain (2) to contact snatch block (1).

TA 090264

2-156

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-31 . Electric Brake Kit.

a. General. Electric brake kit is attached to vehicles hauling trailers or artillery

equipped with electric brakes. Electric brake kit is installed by direct support

maintenance personnel.

(1) Connect trailer electric cable (5) to receptacle (6) above pintle hook (7).

(2) Set rheostat control handle (3). The exact setting for any given load must be

determined by experience.

CAUTION

Test your brakes for proper

setting before going on the open

road.

(3) To engage electric brakes of towed

load, depress vehicle service brakes.

TA 092361

Change 1 2-157

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-32. Airbrake Control Kit.

a. General. Airbrake control kit is installed on vehicles hauling trailers or artillery

equipped with airbrakes. Airbrake kit is installed by direct support maintenance

personnel.

b. Airbrake Kit Operation.

(I) Insei* yoke (5) of trailer or artillery

load into pintle hook (2) of vehicle.

NOTE

Inserting yoke of trailer or

artillery piece requires two or

more crewmembers, depending

on size and weight of load.

(2) Connect airline(s) attached to load

to glad hands (3) of towing truck.

(3) Pull up handle (4) to open airbrake

hose line(s).

(4) Connect trailer brake light cable

(1) to electric receptacle above pintle hook.

(5) Start vehicle engine.

(6) Press in trailer air supply valve (7)

and hold in place for fifteen seconds.

Release valve (7). Valve should remain in

pressed-in position indicating trailer or

artillery airbrake system has proper air

pressure.

(7) Pull down trailer airbrake hand

control (6) to engage brakes of towed load.

NOTE

Airbrake control should be

engaged slowly to provide steady,

even braking.

TA 090266

2-158

TM 9-2320-272-10

Section IV. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

2-33. Special Instructions.

a. General. Special instructions for operating and maintaining vehicles under unusual

conditions are included in this section. Unusual conditions are extreme temperatures,

humidity, and/or terrain. Special care in cleaning and lubrication must be taken in

order to keep vehicles operational when operating under unusual conditions.

b. Cleaning. Refer to paragraph 2-7 for cleaning instructions and precautions.

c. Lubrication.

(1) Refer to LO 9-2320-272-12 for proper lubricating instructions.

(2) Service intervals in LO 9-2320-272-12 are for normal operating conditions.

Reduce intervals to more frequent servicing when operating under unusual conditions.

d. Driving Instructions.

(1) FM 21-305 contains special driving instructions for operating wheeled vehicles.

(2) TM 21-300 contains instructions on driver selection, training, and supervision.

(3) FM 9-207 contains instructions on vehicle operation in extreme cold of 0°F to

-65°F (-17°C to -54°C) or below. Other documents with information on cold weather

vehicle operation are:

(a) FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual.

(b) FM 31-71 Northern Operations.

(c) FM 31-72 Mountain Operations.

e. Special Purpose Kits. Paragraphs describing special purpose kits for operation

under unusual conditions are:

(1) Arctic winterization kit, paragraph 2-29.

(2) Deep water fording kit, paragraph 2-26.

/ Reporting Materiel Failure. Report chronic failure of vehicle, body equipment, or

kits on DA form SF 368 (quality deficiency report — equipment improvement

recommendations) as prescribed by TM 38-750 and as stated in paragraph 1-2 of this

manual.

TA 092362

Change 1 2-159

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-34. Operating in Extreme Cold.

a. General. The operator must always be alert to changes in weather. The operator

must take care of assigned vehicle in order to prevent damage to vehicle because of

sudden changes in weather. The operator should be cautious when starting or driving a

vehicle that has not been operated for a long period. Lubricants may thicken and cause

parts failure. Tires may freeze to the ground or may freeze flat on the bottom if under-

inflated. The operator should be alert to such possibilities in order to prevent

damage to the vehicle.

b. Before Operation.

(1) Perform all before operation services listed in table 2-2, preventive maintenance

checks and services.

(2) Place warm batteries in vehicle before starting engine coolant heater if vehicle

has been parked overnight without heat.

(3) Start engine coolant heater to warm vehicle coolant, engine, and batteries

before attempting to start engine. Refer to paragraph 2-29d for engine coolant heater


c. Starting Engine.

(1) Start engine when engine coolant temperature reads 120°F (49°C) or higher as

indicated by temperature gage (2). Refer to paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting


(2) After engine starts, warm up engine until temperature gage (2) reads

approximately 140°F(60°C).

CAUTION

Shut down engine coolant heater before starting vehicle engine.

CAUTION

Do not shut down engine if temperature gage reads less than

125°F (51.6°C). Run engine 800 to 1,000 revolutions per minute

as indicated by tachometer (1) until coolant temperature is at

least 125°F (51.6°C).

J U.

Q t° l\ °l

TA 090268

2-160

TM 9-2320-272-10

(3) Check instrument readings. If any reading is not normal, stop engine. Report

condition(s) to organizational maintenance if operator troubleshooting cannot correct

malfunction. Normal instrument readings are:

(a) Oil pressure (6) should register 15 psi (103 kPa) with engine idling. I

(b) Air pressure (3) should register 120 psi (827 kPa).

(c) Battery indicator gage (4) should register in green area. I

(d) Coolant temperature gage (2) should register between 165°F to 195°F (74°C to

90°C).

(e) Transmission oil temperature gage (5) should register between 160°F to 220°F I

(71°C to 104°C). I

NOTE

If vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold before starting,

organizational maintenance personnel must warm gear cases,

wheel hubs and control linkage before operator places vehicle in

motion.

d. Driving Vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 5 miles per hour

(8 kilometers) when operating

vehicle in LOW transfer, first

gear.

(1) Drive slowly with transfer shift

lever (9) in LOW gear and transmission

shift lever (8) in "1" (first) gear for 100

yards (91 meters). This should be enough

time to warm up gear cases and tires.

(2) Constantly check instruments during engine operation. Oil pressure gage (6)

may show sudden drop because engine oil consumption will be higher in extreme cold

conditions.

CAUTION

If oil pressure does not register or drops to less than 38 psi (262 kPa)

when vehicle is in motion, stop engine immediately by pulling out

emergency fuel cut-off control (7).

e. Halting or Parking.

(1) Do not idle engine for more than 15 minutes.

(2) Park in a sheltered area out of the wind if possible. Park so vehicle does not

face into the wind if sheltered area is not available.

TA 092363

Change 1 2-161

TM 9-2320-272-10

CAUTION

Operator must take every precaution to prevent snow from

blowing into vehicle engine when parked. Snow will melt and

later form ice to jam throttle controls.

(3) Park vehicle with wood planks, brush, mats, or canvas under the wheels if a

long shutdown period in open area is anticipated.

(5) Place chocks (2) behind vehicle wheels if parking on a grade no matter how

slight.

(6) Drain water from compressed air reservoirs (3) by turning four drain cocks

counterclockwise. Close drain cocks immediately after purging water. Drain cocks are

located near fuel tank on right side of vehicle.

TA 092364

2-162 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(9) Perform after operation services in

table 2-2.

(10) Drain off any accumulated water

in fuel filter/water separator (5). To drain

water from fuel system:

(a) Open fuel line inlet petcock (6),

located near top of fuel filter/water

separator (5).

WARNING

Alcohol used in alcohol

evaporator is flammable,

poisonous, and explosive. Do

not smoke when adding fluid.

Do not drink fluid.

(7) Check fluid level in alcohol

evaporator (4) located on left side of

engine. Add alcohol as required.

(8) Start engine coolant heater if

required. Refer to paragraph 2-29^/ for

engine coolant heater operating

instructions.

CAUTION

Wait ten minutes after shutting

off vehicle engine before

draining fuel filter/water

separator. Ten minutes will

allow enough time for water to

settle in separator sump tank,

but is short enough time to

drain water before it freezes.

(b) Open petcock (7) at bottom of fuel

filter/water separator (5). Allow liquid to

drain off into a suitable container until fuel

is clear of water contamination.

(c) Close petcocks (7) and (6).

CAUTION

Clean away all snow or ice from

dispensing equipment and from

fuel tank filler cap(s) before

removing cap(s) to refuel

vehicle.

(11) At end of daily operations when engine coolant heater is not being operated,

notify organizational maintenance to determine if batteries must be removed.

NOTE

In extremely low temperatures, batteries of vehicles not using engine

coolant heater must be removed by organizational maintenance.

Batteries are then stored in a warm place.

TA 090271

2-163

2-35. Operating in Snow.

a. General.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-12 for cold weather starting instructions.

(2) If vehicle is equipped with arctic winterization kit. refer to paragraph 2-29 for

description and operating instructions.

(3) Operating on snow or on ice requires the use of tire chains on driving wheels.

Refer to FM 21-305 for installation of tire chains.

CAUTION

Attempting operation with only one driving wheel equipped with tire

chain may result in damage to tire and/or power train.

(4) Deflate tire pressure to 25 psi (172 kPa) if tire chains are not available.

Reinflate tires to normal operating pressures after emergency. Refer to table 1-7 or tire

inflation data plate on instrument panel for normal operating tire pressure.

b. Driving Vehicle.

(I) Remove chocks (1) from vehicle

wheels if used.

WARNING

Vehicle operation in snow is a

hazardous condition. Operators

must travel at reduced speeds

and be prepared to .meet sudden

changes in road conditions and

traffic speeds. Maintain safe

stopping distances.

(2) Place transmission selector lever (4)

in "1-5" (drive) and transfer shift lever (5)

in LOW. Place vehicle in motion slowly,

without causing wheels to spin or engine to

race. Place transfer shift lever (5) down to

HIGH gear ratio when vehicle is underway.

TA 092365

2-164 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

WARNING

Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden

stops will cause vehicle wheels to lock, engine to stall and loss of

steering.

(3) If rear end skidding occurs:

(a) Instantly turn steering wheel into direction of the skid.

(b) Let up on accelerator pedal (3) and apply brake pedal (2) in a.gradual,

pumping manner.

c. After Operation.

(1) Remove all ice and snow from underside of vehicle, aii cleaner intake and from

fuel tank(s).

(2) Refuel fuel tank(s) (6) as soon as possible.

(3) Open four petcocks (7) to drain

water from vehicle air reservoirs. Petcocks

(7) are located near fuel tank (6) on right

side of vehicle. Close petcocks immediately

after moisture is no longer being purged.

CAUTION

Wait ten minutes after shutting

off vehicle before draining fuel

filter/water separator (8). Ten

minutes will allow enough time

for water to settle in separator

sump tank, but is short enough

time to drain water before it

freezes.

(4) Drain water from fuel filter/water

separator (8):

(a) Open petcocks (9) and (10) at fuel

filter/water separator (8). Allow water, if

present, to drain off into a suitable

container. Close petcocks (9) and (10).

(b) If you can see large amounts of

water and/or impurities, allow fuel to drain

until fuel is clear.

CAUTION

If one quart or more of fuel must be drained before fuel is clear, fuel tanks

and fueling source should be inspected carefully. Report large amounts of

contamination to organizational maintenance.

(5) Perform after operation services in table 2-2.

(6) Check with organizational maintenance to determine if batteries are to be

removed or if engine coolant heater is to be put in operation.

TA 090273

2-165

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-36. Operating in Extreme Heat.

a. General. Extreme heat exists when

outside temperatures reach 95° F (35° C) or

more. The effect of extreme heat on vehicle

engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.

Operators must adjust driving to conditions

when operating in extreme heat.

b. Before Operation.

(1) Perform before operation services

in table 2-2.

(2) Check for sand or insects in front

of radiator. Blow out all such obstructions

with compressed air.

(2) Frequently check air cleaner

indicator (2). If indicator shows red, park

vehicle, shut off engine, and notify


c. Driving Vehicle.

(I) Avoid continuous vehicle operation

at high speeds. Avoid long, hard pulls on

steep grades with transfer shift lever (1) in

low gear. Drive slower in high altitude, hot

climate operations.

(3) Frequently check temperature gage (3). oil pressure gage (5), and transmission

oil temperature gage (4). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following

conditions exist:

(a) Engine coolant temperature is more than 210°F (99°C) as indicated by

temperature gage (3).

(b) Engine oil pressure drops below 38 psi (262 kPa) or 5 psi (34 kPa) with engine

at idle.

(c) Transmission oil temperature exceeds 300° F (149°C) as indicated by

transmission oil temperature gage (4).

(4) If engine overheating occurs:

CAUTION

Do not raise vehicle hood. Engine will cool faster at idle with hood

closed.

(a) Park vehicle, allowing engine to idle.

NOTE

Radiator fan and engine coolant will begin lowering engine

temperature a few minutes after vehicle stops.

TA 092366

2-166 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

CAUTION

If engine temperature continues to rise or does not show signs of

decreasing after two minutes of idling, radiator fan clutch motor

may be faulty. Refer to paragraph 3-16 for radiator fan clutch

emergency service.

(b) Observe temperature gage (3), transmission oil temperature gage (4), and

engine oil temperature gage (5), for indications that engine is steadily cooling.

(c) Shut off vehicle engine when engine temperature reaches normal operating

'temperatures 165°F to 195°F (74°C to 90° C) as indicated by temperature gage (3).

(d) Perform troubleshooting procedures as listed in table 3-1, after engine has

cooled to normal operating temperatures 165°F to 195°F (73.8°C to 90.5°C).

WARNING

Severe burns can result from opening surge tank filler cap (6) while

engine is running or before engine has cooled below 165°F (74°C) as

indicated by temperature gage (3).

(e) Place a thick cloth over surge tank

filler cap (6). Carefully turn cap (6)

counterclockwise to its first stop to allow

pressure to escape.

(f) Remove cap when cooling system

pressure is vented and check coolant level.

NOTE

Surge tank should be three-

quarters full.

(g) Start vehicle engine and add engine

coolant as required.

CAUTION

Do not add coolant when engine is hot, unless engine is running.

Add coolant slowly.

(4) Proceed with operation. Report any overheating to organizational maintenance

at completion of operation.

TA 092367

Change 1 2-167

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Halting or Parking.

(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible to^ protect tires, canvas, paint,

wood, seals and batteries from sun, dust, and sand.

(2) Adjust tire inflation according to table 1-7.

NOTE

Allow tires to cool before checking tire pressure. Air pressures in

tires read higher when tires are hot.

(3) Check batteries daily and service as required when operating in extreme heat.

2-37. Operating in Dusty, Sandy Areas.

a. General. Vehicles operating in dusty or sandy areas require frequent servicing of

the air filter, cooling system, and lubrication points. Operators should be alert to engine

overheating.

b. Driving Vehicle.

(1) When starting in sand or soft

ground, pull transfer shift lever (2) up to

LOW position and transmission shift lever

(1) in "1-2" (second) or "1-3" (third) gear

position.

(2) Accelerate slowly so wheels will not

spin and dig into sand.

(3) Reduce tire inflation to 25 psi (172

kPa) to increase traction when operating in

deep sand.

(4) Reinflate tires to normal operating pressures after vehicle has cleared deep

sand.

CAUTION

Use a second vehicle with winch or tow to recover vehicles sunk

in deep sand. Do not attempt to jump vehicles out of deep sand

with quick transmission gear changes.

c. Halting or Parking.

(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible to protect tires, canvas, paint,

wood, seals, and batteries from sun, dust, and sand.

(2) At end of daily operation, use pressure air to remove all sand from vehicle

engine and areas around brakes and drum. See after operation services, table 2-2.

(3) If cover is not available, cover vehicle with paulins. When entire vehicle cannot

be covered, protect windows, cab, and engine compartment with paulins to prevent

entry of sand or dust.

TA 092368

2-168 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Use caution while refueling to prevent dust or sand from entering fuel tank.

Tighten filler cap securely after refueling.

2-38. Operating Under Rainy or Humid Conditions.

a. General.

(!) Material inactive for long periods in hot, humid weather can rust rapidly.

Fungus growth may develop in the fuel tank as well as on canvas paulin, seats and

other components. Frequent inspections, cleaning and lubrication are necessary to

maintain the readiness of vehicles in rainy or humid conditions.

(2) Fuel filter/water separator (3) must be drained frequently because of high

condensation in fuel system. To drain fuel filter/water separator (3):

(a) Open fuel line inlet petcock (4), located near top of

(b) Open petcock (5) at bottom of fuel

filter/water separator (3). Allow water, if

present, to drain off into a suitable —

container. 13

(c) If you can see large amounts of C$\

water and/or impurities, allow fuel to drain ^-^N

until fuel is clear.

(d) If little or no fuel passes out of the

filter, report clogging of fuel filter to


(e) Close petcocks (4) and (5), before operating vehicle

CAUTION

If I quart (0.946 liters) or more of fuel must be drained before fuel is clear,

fuel tanks and fueling source should be inspected carefully. Report fuel

contamination to organizational maintenance.

b. Driving Vehicle.

(1) Do not spin wheels when placing vehicle in motion in heavy rain or muddy

conditions. If necessary, place transfer shift lever (2) in LOW gear to obtain a slow,

firm start.

WARNING

• Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on wet or

slipperv roads. Sudden stops will cause vehicle wheels to lock,

engine to stall and loss of steering.

• Do not operate vehicle on wet. smooth roads with lowered tire

inflation. Do not operate at too great a speed for road

conditions. Low tire inflation or excessive speeds may result in

loss of vehicle control on wet. smooth roads.

(2) Lower tire inflation to 25 psi (172 kPa) only when operating off-the-road in

heavy rain. Rcinflate tires immediately to correct pounds per square inch (kilopascals)

when operation changes to paved roads. Refer to table 1-7 for tire inflation data. Refer

to paragraph 3-14 for instructions on tire inflation using vehicle air system.

TA 090277

2-169

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-39. Operating in Deep Mud.

a. General.

(1) Use tire chains in deep mud operations.

CAUTION

All driving wheels must be equipped with tire chains. Attempting to

operate vehicle in deep mud when only one driving wheel is equipped

with tire chain can result in serious damage to tire and/or power

train.

b. Driving Vehicle.

NOTE

Six wheel drive is achieved

automatically when transfer shift

lever (2) is placed in LOW. In

HIGH the front-wheel drive

switch (1) must be engaged to

achieve six wheel drive.

(1) Approach muddy terrain with

transfer shift lever (2) in LOW and

transmission shift lever (3) in "1-4" (fourth)

gear.

(2) Skidding and sudden loss of steering control are operating problems in mud. When

rear end skidding occurs, immediately turn wheels in direction of skid.

CAUTION

Use a second vehicle with winch to recover vehicles sunk in deep

mud. Do not spin wheels. Do not attempt to jump vehicle out of

deep mud with quick transmission gear changes.

c. After Operation.

(1) Wash all mud from vehicle as soon as possible, before it has time to dry and

harden.

(2) Remove tire chains from driving wheels.

(3) If vehicle front winch was used, clean and lubricate.

(4) At end of daily operation, perform after operation services as outlined in table

2-2.

TA 092369

2-170 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

2-40. Operating in Salt Water.

a. General. Salt water causes considerable damage to vehicle components. For this

reason, do not drive needlessly in or through salt water. Vehicle components that do

come in contact with salt water must be washed with fresh water as soon as possible.

Normally, all important vehicle components will ford salt water up to 30 inches (76

centimeters) in depth without fording kit and 78 inches (198 centimeters) with kit

installed.

b. Preparation for Fording.

(1) Make sure engine fuel tank cap(s), hydraulic oil filter cap(s), engine oil

dipstick, surge tank filler cap, power steering reservoir cap, transmission dipstick, oil

fill, and battery caps are secure.

(2) If fording is to be in more than 30 inches (76 centimeters) of water, a deep

water fording kit must be installed by direct support maintenance personnel.

(3) On all models, remove flywheel housing drain plug (6) from storage boss (5)

and install it in drain port (4).

c. Fording Operation in Salt Water.

(1) Place transmission shift lever (3) in

"1" (first) gear and transfer shift lever (2)

up to LOW position.

WARNING

Do not attempt to ford your

vehicle at depths greater than

78 inches ( 198 centimeters).

Limit speed to 3 or 4 miles per

hour (5 or 6 kilometers) while

fording.

TA 092370

Change 1 2-171

TM 9-2320-272-10

(2) Enter water in area with a gentle

slope. Pull out fording control handle (4)

immediately upon entering water.

(3) Maintain an even vehicle speed.

(4) Push in fording control handle (4)

immediately upon leaving water.

d. After Fording Operation.

(1) Remove flywheel housing drain plug (3) from drain port (1) and install in

storage boss (2).

(2) Wash with fresh water all parts of vehicle which were in contact with salt

water as soon as practicable.

(3) Perform after operation services in table 2-2.

TA 092371

2-172 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

CHAPTER 3

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

3-1. Special Tools and Equipment. No special tools or test equipment are required

by the operator for maintenance of M939 series trucks.

13-2. Basic Issue Items. I Tools, equipment, and accessories issued with or prescribed

for use by the operator of M939 series trucks are listed in the basic issue items list in

appendix B of this manual.

3-3. Expendable Supplies and Materials. Supplies and materials required for

operation and maintenance of the equipment covered in this manual are listed in

appendix D.

Section II. LUBRICATION

13-4. Lubrication Order.l Lubrication order LO 9-2320-272-12 designates cleaning and

lubricating procedures for M939 series trucks. This document is issued with each truck

and is carried in vehicle at all times. A damaged or lost lubrication order should be

replaced immediately.

3-5. General Lubrication Instructions.

a. Service Intervals. Service intervals on the lubrication order are for normal

operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric conditions.

b. Application Points. Wipe clean lubricating fittings and surrounding surfaces

before and after applying lubricant.

c. Reports and Records.

(1) Maintain vehicle lubrication record on DA form 2408-1 in equipment daily log

book.

(2) Report unsatisfactory performance of lubricants or preserving materials on

maintenance request DA form SF368 as stated in paragraph 1-2.

3-6. General Lubricating Instructions Under Unusual Conditions.

a. Service Intervals. Increase frequency of lubricating service when operating under

abnormal conditions such as high or low temperatures, prolonged, high-speed driving,

or extended cross-country operations. Such operations can destroy lubricant's protective

qualities. More frequent lubricating service intervals are necessary to maintain vehicle

readiness when operating in abnormal conditions. During inactive periods, with

adequate preservation, service intervals can be extended.

TA 090281

3-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

b. Changing Lubricant Grade. Lubricant grade used changes with weather

conditions. Refer to table 1-6 on pages 1-22 and 1-23 for lubricant grade changes for

the following temperature ranges:

(1) +90°F (+32°C) and above

(2) +32°F to +90° F (0°C to +32°C)

(3) +40° F to -10°F (+4°C to -23° C)

(4) 0°F to -65° F (-17°C to -54°C)

(5) Arctic conditions -25°F to -65° F (-32°C to -54°C)

c. Maintaining Lubricant Levels. Lubricant levels must be checked as specified in

LO 9-2320-272-12. Steps must be taken to replenish and maintain operating levels.

3-7. Lubrication for Continued Operation Below 0°F (-17°C). See FM 9-207,

Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather (0°F to -65° F) or

(-I7°C to -54°C).

Section III. TROUBLESHOOTING

3-8. Troubleshooting Procedures

a. Scope. The troubleshooting table contains instructions that will help the operator

identify and correct simple vehicle malfunctions during operations. The table also helps

the operator identify major mechanical difficulties that must be referred to organi

zational maintenance. The listing of possible malfunctions come under major vehicle

headings. They are:

• Engine

• Heating system

• Transmission

• Transfer

• Brake air system

• Wheels, tires, and hubs

• Steering

• Special body equipment

• Special purpose kits

Beneath these major headings are the symptoms and the corrective action.

NOTE

Operators should perform the corrective action in the order listed.

b. Omissions. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur. If a

malfunction occurs that is not listed in table 3-1, notify your supervisor.

TA 090282

3-2

TM 9-2320-272-10

Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

NOTE

Notify organizational maintenance personnel for corrective actions I

to be taken regarding malfunctions not listed in this table. ™

ENGINE

1. WHEN STARTER SWITCH IS TURNED TO START, ENGINE FAILS TO

CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY.

Step 1. Check to see if battery switch is off. I

Turn switch on.

Step 2. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "N" (neutral) position.

If not. place in "N" (neutral) position.

Step 3. Visually check to see if battery cables are loose, broken, or corroded.

Visually check battery terminals and connections for looseness, damage,

and corrosion. Check battery for proper water level.

Notify organizational maintenance of any damage to batteries, cables and

terminals.

Step 4. Check log book to determine oil weight.

If necessary, have organizational maintenance drain and refill with correct

weight oil.

Step 5. Other causes.

Notify organizational maintenance.

2. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START.

NOTE

Do not completely fill fuel tank(s) before checking visually for leaks

in fuel system.

Step 1. Check to see if fuel gage indicates empty.

Fill fuel tank(s).

TA 092375

Change 1 3-3

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

NOTE

Whenever fuel tank(s) are completely drained and then refilled, the

fuel system must be purged of air (para 3- 10?).

I Step 2. Check to see if emergency fuel cut-off handle on instrument panel is pulled

out.

Push in handle, exit vehicle, and raise hood. Manually reposition fuel cut

off valve located on left side of engine above fuel pump. Move valve from

cut-off position to operating position. Refer to paragraph 2-1 2j. Start

engine.



3. ENGINE CRANKS BUT FAILS TO START AT OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES

BELOW 0°F (-17°C).

| Step 1. Check to see if fuel gage indicates empty

Step 2. Operate ether starting system.

Step 3. Check ether supply by removing ether bottle and shaking.



4. ENGINE STARTS BUT MISFIRES, RUNS ROUGH, OR LACKS POWER.

| Step 1. Check to sec if fuel cut-off handle is partially pulled out.

If handle is partially out. push handle in and reposition fuel cut-off valve

(see malfunction no. 2).

Step 2. Check for air in fuel system.

Purge the fuel system of air (para 3-10?).

Step 3. Check fuel supply system for water and impurities.

Drain fuel filter into a container until fuel is clear (para 2-34, step 10). If

complete draining is required to obtain clear fuel, notify organizational

maintenance to check fuel tank(s) for contamination.



TA 092376

3-4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

5. ENGINE OVERHEATS ACCORDING TO ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE GAGE.

Step I. Check coolant level in surge tank.

Add coolant to surge tank until at least 3/4 full. Check for leakage from

tank and hoses. If leaking, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 2. Check radiator core for obstructions.

If clogged, remove debris (cleaning instructions table 2-1).

Step 3. Check engine oil level.

If low, add oil. Refer to paragraph 3-10/? or LO 9-2320-272-12.



6. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.

Step 1. Check engine oil level.

If low, add oil. Refer to paragraph 3-10/> or LO 9-2320-272-12.

Step 2. Check log book to determine oil weight.

If necessary, have organizational maintenance drain crankcase and refill

with correct weight oil.



7. EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION.

All causes.


8. EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION.

Step 1. Check for restricted air cleaner.

If restricted, clean air cleaner element (para 3-10/).

TA 090285

3-5

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION



9. EXCESSIVE EXHAUST SMOKE.

Step I. Check for restricted air cleaner.

If restricted, clean air cleaner element (para 3-10/).



HEATING SYSTEM

10. HOT WATER PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO PRODUCE HEAT AFTER

ENGINE REACHES OPERATING TEMPERATURE.

| Step 1. Check to see if blower motor switch is in OFF position.

Put blower motor switch in HI or LOW position.

Step 2. Check to see if coolant shutoff cocks are closed. Refer to paragraph 2-3.

Open coolant shutoff cocks.

Step 3. Check for air in heater.

With engine running, open air bleed petcock on engine side of heater and

allow air to escape (para 2-3). Close petcock.



1 1 . HEATER BLOWER MOTOR OPERATES BUT HEAT FAILS TO REACH CAB

OR DEFROSTERS FAIL TO OPERATE.

Step l. Check to see if heat vent control and /or defroster control levers are

adjusted properly.

Adjust heat vent control or defroster control levers to direct heat flow to

desired location. Refer to paragraph 2-3.



TA 092377

3-6 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

TRANSMISSION

12. EXCESSIVE CREEP IN FIRST AND REVERSE RANGE.

Step 1. Hand throttle partially out.

Push hand throttle all the way in.



13. TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING IN ALL RANGES.

Step 1. Check transmission oil level.

If low, add oil (para 3- 1 2).



14. NO RESPONSE TO SHIFT LEVER MOVEMENT.

All causes.


15. ROUGH SHIFTING.

All causes.


1 6 OIL THROWN FROM FILLER TUBE.

Step 1. Transmission oil dipstick loose.

Turn dipstick handle clockwise to tighten. Refer to paragraph 3-12.



TA 090287

3-7

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

17. SLIPPAGE IN ALL FORWARD RANGES.

Step 1. Check transmission oil level.

If low, add oil (para 3-12).



18. VEHICLE MOVES IN NEUTRAL.

All causes.


19. LUBRICANT LEAKAGE.

Step 1. Check for loose hose and pipe connections.

Tighten all loose connections using crescent wrench.



TRANSFER

20. TRANSFER CASE LEVER WILL NOT SHIFT OR SLIPS OUT OF GEAR.

All causes.


21 LUBRICANT LEAKAGE.

Step 1. Check for loose drain plugs.

Tighten loose drain plugs using drain plug wrench along with crescent

wrench.



TA 090288

3-8

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

EXCESSIVE NOISE.

All causes.


BRAKE AIR SYSTEM

INSUFFICIENT AIR PRESSURE AS SHOWN BY LOW AIR PRESSURE

WARNING BUZZER OR AIR PRESSURE GAGES.

Step 1. Check pressure buildup.

Allow time for pressure buildup. |

Step 2. Check to see if air reservoir drain cocks are open. g

Close drain cocks securely. Refer to paragraph 3-11.

Step 3. Check all air lines for loose connections.

Tighten all loose connections with crescent wrench.



24. SERVICE BRAKES DO NOT APPLY.

Step 1. Check for open air reservoir drain cocks. I

Close drain cocks securely. Refer to paragraph 3-11.

Step 2. Check all air lines for loose connections.

Use crescent wrench to tighten all loose connections.



25. UNEVEN BRAKING OR BRAKES DRAGGING.

All causes.


TA 092378

22.

!

23.

Change 1 3-9

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

26. PARKING BRAKE DOES NOT HOLD VEHICLE ON 45 DEGREE INCLINE.

Step 1. Check parking brake handle position.

If partially applied, pull parking brake handle all the way up.

Step 2. Check handle adjustment.

Turn knob on end of lever clockwise to increase braking action,

counterclockwise to decrease braking action.



27. PARKING BRAKE DRAGS OR OVERHEATS.

Step 1. Check parking brake handle position.

If partially applied, release parking brake.



WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS

28. WHEEL WOBBLES OR SHIMMIES.

Step 1. Check for loose wheel stud nuts.

Tighten loose wheel stud nuts using wheel stud nut wrench and handle.



29. EXCESSIVE OR UNEVEN TIRE WEAR.

Step 1. Check air pressure in tires using tire inflation gage and hose assembly.

Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure. See table 1-7.



TA 090290

3-10

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

30. VEHICLE WANDERS OR PULLS TO ONE SIDE ON LEVEL PAVEMENT.





STEERING

31. HARD STEERING.



Step 2. Check power steering reservoir oil level.

If low, add proper oil to FULL mark on dipstick (para 3-1Oc/).



32. OIL LEAKS.

All causes.


SPECIAL BODY EQUIPMENT:

FRONT WINCH

33. WINCH DRUM DOES NOT TURN FREELY WHEN PULLING OUT CABLE.

Step I. Check to see if drum lock knob is engaged. fl

Pull out drum lock knob, rotate 90 degrees, and release. Refer to

paragraph 2- 19.

Step 2. On vehicles with level wind device, check to see if level wind lock knob and I

cable tensioner lock knob and lever are engaged. I

Release level wind lock knob and cable tensioner lock knob and lever.

TA 092379

Change 1 3-11

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION



34. WINCH DOES NOT WIND.

Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir.

If low, add oil to proper level. Refer to paragraph 2-19.

| Step 2. Check to see if winch clutch lever is released.

Engage clutch lever.

Step 3. On vehicles with level wind device, check to see if tensioner lever is not

positioned all the way towards left side of vehicle.

Pull tensioner lever all the way towards left side of vehicle.

Step 4. Check to see if transfer lever is shifted down to HIGH gear position.

If not, shift transfer to HIGH gear.

Step 5. Check to see if power takeoff is engaged.

If not, engage power takeoff.



DUMP BODY HOIST ASSEMBLY

35. HOIST DOES NOT LIFT DUMP BODY.

Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir.

If low, add oil to proper level. Refer to LO-9-2320-272-12.

Step 2. Check for hydraulic leaks.

Tighten loose connections using crescent wrench. If leaks continue, notify


TA 092380

3-12 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 3. Check to see if transfer lever is shifted to HIGH gear.

If not, shift transfer to HIGH gear.

Step 4. Check to see if power takeoff is engaged.

If not, engage power takeoff.

Step 5. Check to see if dump body control lever is pulled back to RAISE position.

If not, pull lever back to RAISE position.



36. BODY RAISES TO FULL DUMP BUT DOES NOT POWER DOWN.

Step 1 . Check to see if dump. body control lever is pushed full forward to LOWER

position.

If not, push lever full forward to LOWER position.



37. HYDRAULIC PUMP NOISY.

Step 1. Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-22.

If low, add oil to proper level. See LO 9-2320-272-12.



38. TAILGATE DOES NOT OPEN.

Step 1. Check to see if tailgate control rod is pulled back and down to unlock

tailgate.

If not, pull tailgate control rod back and down to unlock tailgate.

TA 092381

Change 1 3-13

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 2. Check to see if tailgate chains are restricting tailgate from opening.

Reposition tailgate chains so they will not restrict opening of tailgate.



FIFTH WHEEL ASSEMBLY

39. FIFTH WHEEL NOT OPERATING.

Step 1. Check lubrication.

Lubricate as necessary (see LO 9-2320-272-12).



HYDRAULIC CRANE

40. LACK OF POWER.

Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.





Step 3. Check to see if tachometer indicates 1,250 rpm.

If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 1,250 rpm.

Step 4. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "1-5" (drive).

If not, place transmission selector lever in "1-5" (drive).

Step 5. Check to see if transfer power takeoff is pulled back to engaged position.

If not, pull transfer power takeoff lever back to engaged position.

TA 092382

3-14 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION



41. CRANE DOES NOT LIFT.








42. HYDRAULIC PUMP NOISY.

Step 1. Check level of hydraulic oil in reservoir. Refer to paragraph 2-4.




43. VEHICLE ROLLS WHILE OPERATING CRANE.

Step 1. Check to see if brake-lock switch is in LOCK position.

If not, put brake-lock switch in LOCK position.



REAR WINCH

44. WINCH FAILS TO OPERATE OR LACKS POWER.



TA 092383

Change 1 3-15

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTIONCORRECTIVE ACTION




Step 3. Check to see it tachometer indicates 900 rpm.

If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 900 rpm.

Step 4. Check to see if transmission selector lever is in "1-3" (third) gear for heavy

loads or in "1-5" (drive position) for light loads.

If not, place transmission selector lever in "1-3" (third) gear or "1-5" (drive

position) depending on weight of load.

Step 5. Check to see if transfer power takeoff shift lever is pulled back to engaged

position.

If not, pull transfer power takeoff shift lever back to engaged position.

Step 6. Check to see if level wind lock knob is released.

If not, release level wind lock knob.

Step 7. Check to see if torque control lever is engaged.

If not, engage torque control lever.

Step 8. Check to see if cable tensioner switch is down to engaged position for

winding operation.

If not, pull cable tensioner switch down to engage tensioner for winding

operation.



45. VEHICLE ROLLS WHILE OPERATING REAR WINCH.

Step 1. Check to see if brake-lock switch is in LOCK position.

If not, put brake-lock switch in LOCK position.



TA 092384

3-16 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

EXPANSIBLE VANS

46. POWER LIFT GATE DOES NOT OPERATE OR LACKS POWER.

Step 1 . Check level of hydraulic oil in lift gate reservoir with platform lowered to

ground.

Oil tank should be half full. If not, fill to proper oil level (see

LO 9-2320-272-12).

Step 2. Check for hydraulic oil leaks.



Step 3. Check to see if tachometer indicates 1,000 to 1,200 rpm.

If not, adjust hand throttle control so engine idle speed is set at 1,000 to

1,200 rpm.

Step 4. Check to see if transfer power takeoff is pulled back to ENGAGED

position.

If not. pull transfer power takeoff back to ENGAGED position.

Step 5. Check outside power cable for secure connections if liftgate is powered

from outside electrical source.

Connect power cable securely to power entrance receptacle and power

source:



47. VAN BODY NOT WATERPROOF OR LIGHT SHINES THROUGH GAPS AT

SIDE PANEL.

Step I. Check toggle clamps at side panels. Refer to paragraph 2-24.

If toggle clamp does not draw top of side panel tight enough, loosen

locknut on toggle clamp eyebolt using crescent wrench. Screw eyebolt

inward to close the gap. Tighten locknut.

TA 092385

Change 1 3-17

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 2. Check to see if roof is properly seated.

If not, loosen toggle clamp and push up on hinged roof and out on end

panels while reclosing toggle clamps to ensure seal alinement.

Step 3. Check to see if blackout panels are closed properly.

If not, slide up blackout panels on van sides and rear doors until they latch

in closed position.



48. CEILING LIGHTS AND SERVICE RECEPTACLES FAIL TO ENERGIZE

WHEN DOORS ARE CLOSED UNDER BLACKOUT CONDITIONS.

Step 1. Check to see if blackout circuit switch and /or main circuit breaker

switches are turned off. Refer to paragraph 2-24.

Turn on switches.

Step 2. Check to see if blackout switch is turned off. Refer to paragraph 2-24/.

Turn on blackout switch.

Step 3. Check outside power cable for secure connections if electrical power is

supplied from outside source.


source.



49. EMERGENCY LIGHT, BLACKOUT LIGHT, AND CEILING LIGHTS FAIL TO

ILLUMINATE.

Step 1 . Check to see if main circuit breaker and / or light switches are turned off.

Turn on main circuit breaker or light switches.

Step 2. Check outside power cable for secure connections if electrical power is

supplied from outside source.


source.

TA 092386

3-18 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTIONCORRECTIVE ACTION



50. HEATER WILL NOT IGNITE.

Step 1 . Check to see if main circuit breaker and / or heater switches are turned off.

Refer to paragraph 2-24g.

Turn on main circuit breaker or heater switches.

Step 2. Check to see if thermostat is set to desired temperature.

If not, set thermostat properly.

Step 3. Check fuel level on fuel gage.

Fill fuel tank as necessary.

Step 4. For electrically powered right heater (M935 only), check outside power

cable for secure connections if electrical power is supplied from outside

source.


source.



51. AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR FAILS TO START.

Step l. Check to see if bonnet door is closed. Refer to paragraph 2-24/?.

Push bonnet door control rod forward to open bonnet door.

Step 2. Check to see if main circuit breaker and /or air conditioner switches in

circuit breaker box are turned off.

Turn on main circuit breaker or air conditioner switches.

Step 3. Check to see if power input switch and /or compressor circuit breaker are

turned off.

Turn on power input switch or compressor circuit breaker.

TA 092387

Change 1 3-19

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

I Step 4. Check to see if compressor switch is turned to HIGH when starting air

conditioner.

If not, turn compressor switch to HIGH when starting air conditioner.



SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS:

DEEP WATER FORDING KIT

52. FORDING CONTROL HANDLE INOPERATIVE.

Step 1. Check to see if control handle cable is broken, kinked, or corroded.


Step 2. All other causes, including inoperative fording valve(s).


ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT

53. ENGINE FAILS TO REACH OPERATING TEMPERATURE.

Step 1. Check to see if radiator cover flap is opened. Refer to paragraph 2-29.

Roll cover flap down.

Step 2. Other causes


54. ENGINE TEMPERATURE APPROACHES 195°F (90°C).

Step 1. Check to see if radiator cover flap is closed. Refer to paragraph 2-29.

Roll up cover flap and secure.

Step 2. Check coolant level in surge tank.

Add coolant to surge tank until at least 3/4 full. Check for leakage from

tank and hoses. If leaking, notify organizational maintenance.

TA 092388

3-20 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION



55. FUEL BURNING PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO START WHEN

RUN-OFF-START SWITCH IS HELD IN START POSITION.

NOTE

Heater will not operate if RUN-OFF-START switch is moved to RUN position


Step 1. Check to see if electric fuel pump shutoff valve is closed. Refer to

paragraph 2-29.

Open fuel pump shutoff valve.

Step 2. Check if engine is not running.

Start engine.


Fill fuel tank(s) if necessary.

Step 4. Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button on heater control box to check

operation of circuit.

If indicator lamp does not light up, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 5. Check to see if HI-LO switch on heater control box is set to HI position.

Set HI-LO switch to HI position.

Step 6. All other causes, including defective switch.


56. ENGINE COOLANT HEATER FAILS TO START WHEN RUN-OFF-START

SWITCH IS HELD IN START POSITION.

WARNING

Exhaust gases can kill. Do not operate engine coolant heater in closed area

occupied by personnel.

TA 090301

3-21

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine coolant heater and personnel heater at the same time.

NOTE

Heater will not operate if RUN-OFF-START switch is moved to RUN position


Step 1 . Check to see if heater fuel shutoff valve located in tool box and electric fuel

pump shutoff valve located near air cleaner assembly are closed. Refer to

paragraph 2-29.

Open both fuel shutoff valves.

Step 2. Check to see if battery switch is in OFF position.

Turn battery switch to ON position.



Step 4. Depress PRESS-TO-TEST button on heater control box to check

operation of circuit.

If indicator lamp does not light up, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 5. Check to see if HI-LO switch on heater control box is set to HI or LO

position.

Set HI-LO switch to HI or LO position.

NOTE

Select HI position if engine is cold. Select LO position if engine is already well

heated. Switch will automatically change to LO position when coolant

temperature exceeds 195°F (90° C). Switch will automatically change to HI

position when coolant temperature drops below 120°F (48° C).

TA 090302

3-22

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 6. All other causes, including defective switch.


57. EXCESSIVE ELAPSED TIME BEFORE HEATER IGNITION.

Step 1. Check battery indicator gage.

If needle is not in green area, see malfunction 1, step 3. If this does not

remedy problem, notify organizational maintenance.



58. HEATER FAILS TO CONTINUE BURNING.





59. HEATER OUTPUT IS LOW.

Step 1. Check if Hl-LO switch is in LO position.

Set switch to HI position.

TA 090303

3-23

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 2. All other causes, including defective fuel system or defective heater.


60. WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERS NOT OPERATING.

Step 1. Check adjustment of defroster control handle.

Adjust defroster control handle.

Step 2. Check for restrictions in defroster deflectors.

Clear restriction.



61. ENGINE OIL SHROUD NOT RECEIVING HEAT (ENGINE COOLANT

HEATER ONLY).

Step 1. Check to see if coolant heater is operating. Refer to paragraph 2-29J.

Start heater. If inoperative, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 2. Check to see if coolant heater exhaust tube is disconnected from oil pan

shroud.


TA 090304

3-24

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

62. ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM NOT RECEIVING HEAT (ENGINE COOLANT

HEATER ONLY).

Step 1. Check to see if coolant heater is operating. Refer to paragraph 2-29.

Start heater. If inoperative, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 2. Check to see if one or more shutoff cocks are closed at engine or coolant

heater.

Open coolant shutoff cock(s).

Step 3. Check for restriction in coolant hose(s).




A-FRAME KIT

63. WINCH INOPERATIVE.

Check winch.

See malfunction nos. 33 and 34.

64. A-FRAME INOPERATIVE OR MISALINED.

Step 1. Check to see if cable is secured in towing pintle.

If not, secure cable in towing pintle and lock pintle in closed position.

Step 2. Check for loose cable clamps and frays or breaks in cable.


Step 3. Check to see if A-frame is bent.




TA 092389

I

Change 1 3-25

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELECTRIC BRAKE KIT

65. TRAILER BRAKES DO NOT APPLY SUFFICIENTLY WHEN SERVICE

BRAKES ARE DEPRESSED.

Step 1. Check to see if rheostat setting is too low forthe load being towed. Refer to

paragraph 2-31.

Raise rheostat setting to adjust for heavy payload.

Step 2. Check to see if trailer electrical cable is not securely connected to receptacle

above pintle hook.

Securely connect electrical cable to receptacle.



66. TRAILER BRAKES GRAB TOO HARD WHEN SERVICE BRAKES ARE

DEPRESSED.

Step 1. Check to see if rheostat setting is too high for the load being towed.

Lower rheostat setting to adjust for light load.



AIRBRAKE CONTROL KIT

67. TRAILER AIRBRAKES DO NOT APPLY WHEN AIRBRAKE CONTROL

HANDLE IS PULLED DOWN.

Step 1 . Check to see if trailer air supply valve is not in pressed-in position. Referto

paragraph 2 32.

Press in trailer air supply valve and hold in place for fifteen seconds.

Release valve. If valve does not stay in, notify organizational maintenance.

Step 2. Check to see if trailer air lines are not securely connected to glad hands of

towing truck.

Securely connect trailer air lines to glad hands.

TA 090306

3-26

TM 9-2320-272-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 3. Check to see if glad hand valves are closed.

Open glad hand valves.



TA 090307

3-27

TM 9-2320-272-10

Section IV. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

13- 9. General.! The operator/ crew is responsible for daily, weekly, and monthly

preventive maintenance checks and services listed in table 2-2. Certain other

maintenance services, also the responsibility of the operator/ crew, are listed in this

section.

13-10. Engine Service. |

a. General. To perform engine service the hood must be unlatched and secured in the

opened position. After completing engine service, release hood, lower it to fixed

position, and latch it. Refer to paragraph 2-3.

b. Engine Crankcase Oil Level.

CAUTION

Never operate engine with oil level below L (low) level mark or

above H (high) level mark.

(1) Oil level dipstick (4) is located on

right side engine compartment directly

below coolant surge tank (2).

(2) Turn dipstick handle

counterclockwise to free dipstick (4) from

dipstick tube (3) and withdraw dipstick (4). -|

(3) Wipe clean and return to dipstick

tube (3) but do not tighten handle.

(4) Withdraw dipstick (4) slowly to

prevent a false reading. Keep oil level as

near as possible to H (high) mark on

dipstick. Seven quarts (6.6 liters) of oil are

required to raise oil level from L (low)

mark to H (high) mark on dipstick.

(5) If engine oil level is low, remove oil filler cap, located at top of engine, and

add engine oil as prescribed in LO 9-2320-272- 12. Do not overfill. Replace oil filler

cap, tighten cap securely, and wipe away any oil spilled.

(6) After checking or adjusting oil level, reinstall dipstick (4) in tube (3). Make

sure dipstick (4) is seated in tube opening, then tighten handle by turning it clockwise.

TA 092390

3-28 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

c. Coolant Surge Tank.

WARNING

Extreme care should be taken when removing surge tank filler

cap (1) if temperature gage reads above 195°F (90°C). Do not

add coolant to cooling system when engine is hot unless engine is

running. Add coolant slowly.

(1) Remove coolant surge tank filler cap (1). Visually check coolant level. Surge

tank (2) should be three-fourths full before operation, slightly above three-fourths full

after operation.

(2) If coolant level is low, add until three-fourths full.

(3) If it is necessary to add coolant during operation or after operation, follow

WARNING procedure above.

d. Power Steering Reservoir.

(1) The power steering reservoir (7) is

located on left side of engine near the

radiator. Check oil level with reservoir

dipstick (6), after operation while engine is

hot. Oil level should be at FULL mark on

dipstick (6).

(2) If oil level is low, add oil as

prescribed in LO 9-2320-272-12. Replace oil

filler cap (5), tighten securely, and wipe

away any oil spilled.

e. Fuel Filter.

(1) Service Operation.

(a) The fuel filter (9) is located under

left-front fender and requires daily

maintenance, normally before operation.

Two petcocks (8) must be opened, drained,

and then closed for service.

(b) Open fuel line inlet petcock (8)

located near top of fuel filter (9).

TA 090309

3-29

TM 9-2320-272-10

(f) After service has been completed, cl

(2) at bottom of fuel filter.

(c) Open petcock (2) at bottom of fuel

filter and drain off approximately one pint

(0.473 liters) of liquid into a container.

(d) If there are large amounts of water

and impurities, allow fuel to drain until

fuel is clear. If complete draining is

necessary to obtain clear fuel, inspect fuel

tank(s) and fueling source for

contamination.

(e) If fuel tank(s) are found to be

contaminated with water and impurities,

complete draining is required. This is

coordinated with organizational

maintenance. The fuel filter element will

also be serviced at this time.

;e fuel line inlet petcock (1) and petcock

(2) Priming Fuel System.

(a) The fuel system must be primed whenever the fuel filter element is replaced

and after a complete draining of the fuel system.

(b) Open air purge petcock (3) at hand priming pump (4).

(c) Place a two-gallon container under air purge petcock (3). Operate hand primer

pump (4) to discharge a combination of fuel and air from the fuel systm. Continue

pumping until all air is expelled and a steady How of fuel is observed. Stop hand

primer pump (4) operation and close air purge petcock (3). Dispose of waste fuel

properly.

(3) Final Inspection. Start engine and check for unusual noises and any fuel

system leaks.

TA 090310

3-30

TM 9-2320-272-10

/ Air Cleaner.

(1) General. Air cleaner service is required whenever the red band is visible in

window of air cleaner indicator (5) on instrument panel. The operator will service the

air cleaner in an emergency situation.

WARNING

Keep fingers out from under or directly

above the locking end of securing latches

during removal or installation. Serious

injury can result if fingers are caught

beneath latches and or if fingers are

struck by latch when 'unsnapped.

CAUTION

Do not operate engine without an air

cleaner element except in extreme

emergency.

(2) Removal.

(a) Release latch securing rear retaining strap (7), and spread apart strap (7).

(b) Release five latches securing air cleaner body (8) to air cleaner manifold (6).

(c) Remove air cleaner body (8). gasket (9), and element (10).

NOTE

Notify organizational maintenance if filter element (10) is

damaged, or cannot be cleaned by tapping.

(3) Cleaning Element by Tapping.

CAUTION

Do not strike ends of element (10) on hard surface, or damage can

result.

TA 090311

3-31

TM 9-2320-272-10

(a) Hold element (1) so neither end

(a) Position air cleaner element (1). and gasket (2) in air cleaner manifold (5) with

closed end of element (1) facing outward.

WARNING

Keep fingers out from under or directly above the locking end of

securing latches during removal or installation. Serious injury can

result if fingers are caught beneath latches and /or if fingers are

struck by latch when unsnapped.

(b) Position air cleaner body (3) over element (1) with arrows on end of body (3)

pointing up.

(c) Secure cleaner body (3) to manifold (5) with five latches.

(d) Secure rear retaining strap to hanger (4).

(6) Final Inspection. Start engine and press top of air cleaner indicator to release

red band. If red band does not disappear, report condition to organizational

maintenance.

TA 090312

3-32

TM 9-2320-272-10

3-11. Air Reservoirs. I

a. General. Four drain cocks, located on right side of vehicle next to tool box, are

used to drain moisture from four air reservoirs after each day's operation.

b. Service.

(1) Turn drain cocks counterclockwise to drain moisture from:

(a) Primary airbrake system air

reservoir (6).

(b) Secondary airbrake system air

reservoir (7).

(c) Airbrake system wet tank

reservoir (8).

(d) Spring brake air reservoir (9).

(2) After all moisture has been drained and air only is coming out, turn drain

cocks clockwise to close.

c. Final Inspection. Make sure drain cocks are closed tight to prevent air escaping.

If air escapes after drain cocks are closed tight, notify organizational maintenance

immediately.

3-12. Transmission Oil Level.

a. General. The transmission oil level is checked weekly with engine running at idle

and transmission in neutral. Transmission oil level dipstick (11) is located under trap

door (10) on floor of cab in front of two-person crew seat.

b. Checking Oil Level.

(1) Clean around end of fill pipe (12)

before removing dipstick.

(2) Turn dipstick handle (11)

counterclockwise and pull out dipstick.

(3) Wipe clean and return dipstick to

fill pipe (12) but do not tighten handle (11).

TA 090313

3-33

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Withdraw dipstick slowly to prevent a false reading. If transmission oil

temperature gage (1) on instrument panel reads 180°F (82° C) or below, level on

dipstick (2) should show between marks designated for normal run (3).

CAUTION

Do not overfill transmission.

(5) If transmission oil level is low, add oil through fill pipe as prescribed in

LO 9-2320-272- 12. Return dipstick to fill pipe, tighten dipstick handle, and wipe awa

any oil spilled.

3-13. Wheels and Tires.

a. General. Tires are checked for cuts, gouges, cracks, penetrating objects, and flats

before operation. Proper air pressure is checked weekly. Tires found to be flat must be

replaced. Stop vehicle immediately, if tactical situation permits, whenever a tire

becomes flat while operating.

b. Spare Tire Removal. Models M923 through M928. M93I. and M932 are equipped

with extendable spare tire boom. Dump trueks (M929. M930), and vans )M934, M935),

employ stationary chain falls. Wrecker (M936) models use the vehicle crane to lift and

lower spare tire.

TA 090314

3-34

TM 9-2320-272-10

(1) Obtain chain fall (1 1) from tool compartment on right side of vehicle.

(2) Hook chain fall (1 1) to chain (12) securing tire and boom roller (8).

(3) Remove retaining pin (9) from boom brace (10), and slide out boom (7) until

holes are alined with boom brace (10). Secure with retaining pin (9).

(4) Remove wing-nut locking pin (4), and wing-nut (5) securing wheel brace (14) to

threaded bar (6).

(5) Lift wheel brace (14) from boom base (13), and threaded bar (6). Lower

threaded bar (6) until resting flat on boom base (13).

(6) Pull chain (12) to slightly raise tire and slide tire along boom (7) until roller (8)

hits stop (15).

WARNING

Keep tire from swinging. Serious injury can be caused if

personnel are struck by a swinging tire.

(7) Pull on chain (12) to lower tire to ground.

(8) Remove chain (12) securing tire to

c. Tire Removal.

(1) Apply vehicle hand brake. If

vehicle is on an incline, chock wheels on

both sides.

(2) Remove hydraulic jack (17), jack

handle (16), wheel stud nut wrench (18),

and handle (20) from tool compartment on

right side of vehicle.

in fall (11).

(3) Install wheel stud nut handle (20)

through wrench (18) and lit wrench (18) on

wheel stud nuts (19). Loosen all wheel stud

nuts (19) but do not remove.

NOTE

Wheel stud nuts (19) on the left

side have left-hand threads.

Those on the right have right-

hand threads. Studs and nuts

are marked L and R accord

ingly.

TA 090315

3-35

TM 9-2320-272-10

(4) Turn jack screw (1) of jack (5) out approximately three inches (7.6 cm). Close

bleeder valve (4) at base of jack (5) by turning valve (4) clockwise with slotted end of

jack handle (3).

NOTE

Place a block under jack (5) if used on soft terrain.

(5) Position jack (5) under axle housing (2) near wheel to be removed. Insert

handle (3) into jack (5). Move jack handle (3) up and down until tire is off the ground.

(6) Remove all wheel stud nuts from wheel to be removed. Remove wheel from

axle. If inner wheel is to be removed, reverse wheel stud nut wrench (6), remove handle

(7), and install near large end of wrench (6). Remove all wheel stud nuts, then remove

inner wheel and tire assembly.

TA 090316

3-36

TM 9-2320-272-10

d. Replacement.

NOTE

Tread depth and pattern of dual tires should be matched as

closely as possible.

(1) Position wheel and tire on axle hub over wheel studs. On inner and front

wheels, ventilating hole should be alined with brake drum inspection hole (8). If inner

wheel was replaced, make certain inner stud nuts are properly seated as they are

installed. Tighten securely in sequence shown.

NOTE

Have stud nuts checked and torqued to 450-500 lb-It

(610 678 N«m) by organizational maintenance as soon as

possible.

(2) Place outer wheel over axle hub and position so valve stem is opposite to that

of inner wheel. Ventilating holes in outer wheels should be directly alined with

ventilating holes in the inner wheel. Tighten all wheel stud nuts securely in sequence

shown above.

(3) Use slotted end of jack handle (3) to turn bleeder valve (4) counterclockwise.

When tires touch ground, remove jack (5) from under axle housing. Replace wheel and

tire removed on to spare wheel and tire carrier.

NOTE

Return unserviceable wheel and tire assembly to organizational

maintenance for repair, replacement, or exchange.

TA 090317

3-37

TM 9-2320-272-10

3-14. Tire Inflation.

a. General. Tires require a pressure check on a weekly basis. Inflation pressure is

one of the most important elements of tire care. Pressure recommendations for tires on

all models have been carefully selected to provide good tire life. See table 1-7 for

recommended tire pressures. Check and adjust tire pressures when tires are cold,

because pressures normally increase during operation. Never decrease pressure of warm

tires except for operations in mud, sand or snow. Reinflate tires which were deflated

for operations in mud, sand, or snow after operations are completed.

b. Tire Gaging.

(1) Remove tire inflation gage (10), and hose (4) assembly from tool compartment.

(2) Start at one corner of vehicle and gage all tires. Remove tire valve caps, apply

tire gage air chuck (8) on tire valve (7), and press down to read tire pressure on gage

dial (9). Reinstall tire valve caps and tighten caps finger tight.

c. Tire Inflation.

(I) Start engine and set hand brake. Make sure air reservoir pressure is higher

than recommended tire pressure by checking primary and secondary air pressure gages

on instrument panel.

(2) Remove glad-hand covers (3). Install tire inflation gage (10) and hose (4)

assembly coupling (5) to the left-front emergency trailer air glad-hand (l) to inflate

front tires and right-rear emergency trailer glad-hand (l) to inflate rear tires. Turn

trailer air valve handle (2) at glad-hand (l) 90° counterclockwise to release compressed

air to gage (10), and hose (4) assembly.

(3) Remove tire valve cap, apply air chuck (8) on tire valve stem (7), and press

down firmly. Depress air chuck lever (6) to inflate tire. Release lever (6) momentarily to

read tire pressure on gage dial (9). Adjust tire pressure as necessary.

(4) When tire inflation operation is completed, turn trailer air valve handle (2) 90°

clockwise to close. Uncouple gage (10). and hose (4) assembly from trailer air glad-hand

(I), and install cover (3) on glad-hand (I).

(5) Return tire inflation gage (10). and hose (4) assembly to tool compartment.

TA 0903 18

3-38

TM 9-2320-272-10

3-15. Brake Service.

a. General. Spring brakes in M939 series trucks lock automatically and stop the

vehicle whenever a large loss of air pressure occurs. In such situations, the spring in

each spring brake must be manually disengaged before the vehicle can be towed away

for repairs. This procedure is performed by an operator only in an emergency.

b. Type of Brake. The spring brakes used in M939 series trucks contain a release bolt

(13) stored between the service chamber and spring brake chamber.

c. Releasing the Spring.

WARNING

Make sure vehicle hand brake is set and wheels are chocked

before releasing springs in spring brakes. Failure to do so may

result in vehicle rolling out of control.

(I) To release spring in brakes:

CAUTION

Do not lose rubber plugs (12). After removal, store all four plugs

in map compartment inside cab so they may be found and

reinstalled later by organizational maintenance.

(a) Remove rubber plug (12) from spring brake chamber (11).

CAUTION

If inside of brake chamber (11) is clogged with mud, sand, or

dirt, do not proceed with spring release operation unless the

chamber can be cleared. Notify organizational maintenance if

chamber cannot be cleared.

TA 090319

3-39

TM 9-2320-272-10

(b) Visually inspect inside of brake chamber (4) for mud, sand or dirt.

(c) Remove nut (3), washer (2) and remove release bolt (1) from storage

housing (5).

(d) Insert T-end of release bolt (1) all the way into brake chamber (4) and turn

bolt one quarter of a turn.

(e) Pull on bolt (1) to make sure it is firmly holding spring plate within the

chamber.

NOTE

If release bolt (1) cannot be pulled directly out of spring chamber

(4) after it has been turned, bolt (1) is properly seated.

1(f) Insert washer (2) and nut (3) on end of release bolt (1). With adjustable wrench

tighten nut (3) down until it is in contact with spring chamber (4).

CAUTION

Measure thread of the release bolt only. Do not include nut (3)

in the three inch (7.6 centimeter) measurement of release bolt (1).

(g) Turn nut (3) clockwise until at least three inches (7.6 centimeters) of thread of

the release bolt (1) extends out of the spring brake chamber (4), washer (2), and

nut (3).

|3-16. Radiator Fan Clutch Emergency Service.

a. General. The radiator fan in M939 series trucks normally activates when the

engine temperature exceeds 185°F (85°C) within normal operating range of 165°F to

195° F (74°C to 90°C). It is possible, however, for the thermostat governing fan

operation to become damaged. This will result in engine overheating. In an emergency,

the operator can bypass the fan thermostat by bolting the fan to the engine's fan clutch

assembly. This procedure is performed by the operator only when service by

organizational maintenance personnel is not readily available.

TA 092391

3-40 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

b. Symptoms.

(1) Engine temperature exceeds 195° F (90° C) as indicated by temperature gage (8).

(2) Operator has stopped vehicle and allowed engine to idle as prescribed in

paragraph 2-36b(4).

(3) Temperature gage (8) indicates engine is not cooling, or engine temperature

continues to rise after two-minute idle period.

c. Inspection. With engine continuing to

idle, raise vehicle hood and inspect fan (9)

for operation. If fan is not turning, fan

clutch thermostat is damaged. Operator

must immediately shut down engine and

notify organizational maintenance. If

service is not readily available, perform

step d, emergency service.

d. Emergency Service.

WARNING

• Make certain battery switch (6) and ignition switch (7) are in

OFF position. Make certain crew inside vehicle cab are aware

of danger in engaging these switches while emergency service is

being performed. Failure to comply with this warning may

result in fan blade suddenly engaging, and in serious injury to

operator performing the emergency service.

• Do not allow hands to contact engine during emergency

service. Serious burns can result from contact with engine

block.

(1) Stop engine by shutting off ignition switch (7) and battery switch (6).

TA 090321

3-41

TM 9-2320-272-10

(2) Raise and secure vehicle hood in up position. Refer to paragraph 2-17.

(3) With adjustable wrench, remove two clutch override lockup bolts (2) from

storage boss on fan clutch support bracket (1).

(4) Line up alinement mark (4) on side of fan mounting plate with alinement mark

(3) on side of fan clutch assembly. Fan mounting plate turns freely by hand.

NOTE

Because fan clutch assembly is a moving part when engine is

running, alinement mark (4) may be located in different position

from position shown in illustration.

(5) With alinement marks (4) and (3) lined up, insert two clutch override lockup

bolts (2) into holes of fan mounting plate and secure fan mounting plate to fan clutch

assembly.

(6) Tighten override lockup bolts (2) with adjustable wrench until fully seated.

(7) Close and secure hood (para 2-17).

(8) Start engine and allow engine to cool at idle speed until engine temperature

drops to normal operating temperature range of 165°F to I95°F (74° C to 90° C).

(9) Proceed to organizational maintenance with vehicle. Make certain

organizational maintenance is notified of emergency service performed on vehicle.

TA 092392

3-42 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A-1. Publication Indexes.

The following indexes should be consulted frequently for latest changes or revisions and for

new publications relating to materiel covered in this manual.

Military Publications:

Index of Blank Forms

Index of Technical Manuals. Technical Bulletins. Supply

Manuals (Types 7, 8, and 9), Supply Bulletins and

Lubrication Orders

A-2. Other Publications:

a. Technical Manuals.

The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) TM 38-750

Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in

Cold Weather (0° to -65° F) FM 9-207 |

b. Technical Bulletins.

Use of Antifreeze Solutions and Cleaning Compounds in Engine

Cooling Systems TB 750-651

c. Cold Weather Operations.

Basic Cold Weather Manual

Northern Operations

d. Lubrication Orders.

Lubrication Order, Truck, 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 Series LO 9-2320-272-12

e. Destruction to Prevent Enemy Use.

Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment

to Prevent Enemy Use TM 750-244-6

/ General.

Recommended Changes to DA Publications DA Form 2028-2

Maintenance Request DA Form 2407

Equipment Daily or Monthly Log DA Form 2408-1

Quality Deficiency Report (Category II) DA Form SF 368 ■

TA 092393

DA PAM 310-1

DA PAM 310-1

FM 31-70

FM 31-71

Change 1 A-1 (A-2 blank)

TM 9-2320-272-10

APPENDIX B

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST

AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Section I. INTRODUCTION

B-1 . Scope.

This appendix lists integral components and basic issue items for M939 series, 5-ton, 6x6,

trucks. The appendix is designed to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient

operation.

B-2. General.

a. Section II, Integral Components of the End Item. These items are installed in the

vehicle at time of manufacture or rebuild. (None authorized for M939 series.)

b. Section III, Basic Issue Items (BII). These are the minimum essential items

required to place and maintain M939 series vehicles in operation. Although shipped

separately packed, BII must accompany the truck during operation and whenever it is

transferred between accountable offices. The illustrations will assist you in identifying

each basic issue item.

B-3. Explanation of Columns.

a. Item Number. Number used to identify item called out in illustration.

b. National Stock Number. Indicates national stock number assigned to item which

will be used for requisitioning.

c. Description. Indicates Federal item name and, if required, a minimum description

to identify item.

d. Federal Supply Code for Manufacturer (FSCM).

Code Manufacturer

00741 Airco Industrial Gases, Div. of Air Reduction Co. Inc.

03306 Ampco Metal Div., Ampco — Pittsburgh Corp.

04741 White Motor Corp Autocar Division

06023 Rego Div. of Golconda Corp.

09386 Budd Co.. The Automotive Div.

17941 Uniweld Products Inc.

18876 Army Missile Command

19204 Rock Island Arsenal /

19207 U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command

21440 Glamorene Products Corp.

21450 Army Weapons Command ATTN: AMSWE-REE-S

Ordnance Corps Engineering Standards Rock Island Arsenal

24617 General Motors Corp.

32779 Alert Stamping and Mfg. Co.. Inc.

TA 092394

Change 1 B-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

Code Manufacturer

36346 Union Carbide Corp., Linde Div.

42527 National Cylinder Gas Div., Chemetron Corp.

55681 Smith Welding Equipment Div. of Tescom Corp.

55719 Snap-On Tools Corp.

56770 ANT Corp.

57068 Stanley Works

63026 Victor Equipment Co.

65814 Williams J H and Co.

77243 Peterson Mfg Co., Inc.

77348 Plumb Fayetter R Inc.

80063 Army Electronics Command Procurement and Production

Directorate

80244 General Services Administration Federal Supply Service

81337 Army Natick Laboratories Quality Assurance and Engineering

Office

81348 Federal Specifications Promulgated by General Service

Administration

81349 Military Specification Promulgated by Standardization Div.

Directorate of Logistic Services DSA

84150 Andrews Hardware and Metal Co.

90598 American Air Filter Co. Inc.. Defense Products Group

93389 Proto Tool Co.

96906 Military Standards

Ie. Part Number. Indicates primary number used by manufacturer for control of

design and characteristics of item, through engineering drawings, specifications,

standards, and inspection requirements, used to identify an item or range of items.

/ Usable on Code. "USABLE ON" codes help you identify items which are used on

different models. Codes used in this column are:

Code Used On Code Used On

A All V20 M929 wo/winch

V15 M923 wo/winch V19 M930 w/ winch

V13 M924 wo/winch V22 M931 wo/winch

V14 M925 w/winch V21 M932 w/winch

V12 M926 w/winch V24 M934 wo/winch

V17 M927 wo/winch V25 M935 wo/winch

V16 M928 w/winch V18 M936 w/winch

g. Quantity Required. This column lists quantity of each item required for a

complete major item.

NOTE

Publications packaged with equipment are TM 9-2320-272-10 and

LO 9-2320-272-12.

TA 092395

B-2 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

B-4. Abbreviations.

The following abbreviations appear in the description column.

Abbr. Explanation

ft foot (feet)

in. inch(es)

lb pound(s)

w/ with

wo/ without

pts pints

qts quarts

gals gallons

1 liter

cm centimeter

Section II. INTEGRAL COMPONENTS OF

END ITEM LIST

B-5. General.

These items are installed in the vehicle at time of manufacture or rebuild. (None authorized

for M939 series ).

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

B-6. General.

These are the minimum essential terns required to place and maintain M 939 series vehicles in

operation. Although shipped separately packed, B1I must accompany the truck during

operation and whenever it is transferred between accountable offices. The illustrations will

assist you to identify each basic issue item.

TA 090326

Change 1 B-3

TM 9-2320-272-10

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code

COMMON EQUIPMENT, COMMON TOOLS

(all trucks and chassis)

1. 2540-00-670-2459 BAG: pamphlet, cotton duck,

3 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 11-1/4 in.

(in map compartment behind

crew seat) (19207) 7961712

A 1

2. 5140-00-315-2775 BAG: tool, cotton duck

10 in. x 20 in., w/flap (in

access step tool box)

(81337) 5-7-1

A 1

3. 5120-00-264-3796 WRENCH: open end, adj, 0 in.

to 1.322 in. jaw opng, 12 in. long,

phos finish, type I, class A

(in tool box) (19207) 1 1655778-5

A 1

4. 5120-00-227-7338 SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, hvy duty,

flared sides, steel handle with wood

inserts, sq. blade, 1/2 in. wide tip,

5 in. blade, 9-1^2 in. long [in tool

bag (2) (pg. B-4)] (96906) M S 1 5220-5

A 1

5. 5120-00-234-8912 SCREWDRIVER: cross tip,

Phillips type, plastic handle, no. 3, 6

blade, 10-1/8 in. long [in tool bag (2)

(pg. B-4)] (96906) MS 15224-6

A 1

in.

B-4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

6. 5120-00-316-9217

9.

5120-00-243-2419

5120-00-595-8396

4910-01-038-2820

5120-00-061-8546


(Cont'd)

WRENCH: wheel stud nut, A

straight, double socket, l-T/2 in.

hexagon opening, 13/ 16 in. square

opening, 17 in. to 19 in. long, type II,

size 1, no. 2 length (access step tool

box) (09386) 34379

HANDLE: bar, wheel stud nut A

wrench, 3/4 in. diameter x 30 in.

long, phosphate finish (in access

step tool box) (19207) 6196147

JACK: hydraulic, hand, 8-ton A

capacity, 1 1 in. closed, 23-1 /8 in.

open w/ operating lever (in access

step tool box) (04741) 16W233

GAGE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY: A

tire inflation, self contained w/ 15 ft

hose (in access step tool box)

(19207) 1 1677140-5

HAMMER: hand, machinists,

ball-peen, 2 lb, 15 in. to 17 in. lg,

type II, class I, style A (81348)

GGG-H-86

A w/front

winch

I

TA 092397

Change 1 B-5

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-222-8852

I

5120-00-494-1911

5315-00-732-1019

5120-01-108-3095

5210-00-234-8913


(Cont'd)

SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, flared A

sides, plastic handle, round blade.

1 /4 in. wide tip, 4 in. long blade,

7-3/4 in. overall length [in tool bag

(2) (pg. B-4)] (93389) 9832

PLIERS: combination, slip-joint, A

straight nose, w/cutter, 8 in. long,

phosphate finish [in tool bag (2)

(pg. B-4)] (19207) 1 1655775-3

WRENCH: oil drain plug, straight A

bar key, 1 /2 in. square, 2-1 /2 in.

long [in tool bag (2) (pg. B-4)]

(96906) MS20066-543

WRENCH: open end, adjustable, A

.95 jaw opening. 8 in. long (access

step tool box) (19207) 1 1655778-3

SCREWDRIVER: cross tip, A

Phillips, plastic handle, point

no. 2, 4 in. blade, 7-1/2 in. overall

length [in tool bag (pg. B-4)]

(19207) 1 1655777-12

TA 092398

B-6 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

4010-01-114-3728

7. 3950-01-110-9278

EQUIPMENT, SPARE TIRE HANDLING

CHAIN ASSEMBLY: single leg. All

w/grab hook, w/ring end link, except

750 lb work load, zinc finish V18

(in access step tool box)

(19207) 12256287

HOIST ASSEMBLY: chain, hand All

operated, hook suspension, except

250 lb rated load (in access V18

step tool box) (19207) 1 1669273

EQUIPMENT—MISCELLANEOUS

5340-00-912^086

9. 5340-00-682-1508

PADLOCK SET: keyed alike,

1-1/2 in. size, w/clevis and

chain, composed of 2 padlocks,

2 keys per set (tool box—vehicle

right side) (96906) MS21313-160

PADLOCK SET: keyed individ

ually, 1-1/2 in. size, w/clevis and

chain, w/2 keys (tool box—vehicle

right side) (96906) MS35647-3

VI5,V13,V14.

V12,V17,V16,

V22.V21

V20,VI9

TA 093186

Change 1 B-7

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code

With

Equp.

TOOLS, PIONEER

1. 5110-00-293-2336 AX: single bit, 4 lb. head weight,

4-3/4 in. cutting edge, 35-1 / 2 in. to

36-1 /2 in. long, type I, class 1,

design A, olive drab finish

[stowed in compartment no. IB

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 6150925

V18 1

2. 5120-00-243-2395 MATTOCK: pick type, 5 lb.

w/o handle, olive drab finish,

type 11, class F [stowed in compart

ment no. IB (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 1 1677022

V18 1

3. 5120-00-293-3336 SHOVEL: hand, round point,

D-handle, short, size 2,

olive drab finish, type IV,

class A, style 1 [stowed in

compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 1 1656784

V18 1

4. 5120-00-288-6574 HANDLE: mattock pick, rail

road or clay pick, 36 in. long,

olive drab finish grade AA

[stowed in compartment no. IB

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 11677021

V18 1

TA 09033

B-8

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT-

EXPANSIBLE VANS (M934 AND M935)

Usable

On Code

5. 6140-00-851-4573 CABLE: ground, 48 in. long,

w/rod (8380403) (stowed in rear

exterior compartment)

(19207) 7017575

V24,V25 1

6. 2510-00-790-2296 ROD: ground, 3/4 in. diameter

x 30 in. long, w/crossbar. Used

with ground cable (7017575)

(stowed in rear exterior com

partment) (19207) 8380403

V24,V25 1

7. 5120-00-650-7830 WRENCH: ratchet, reversible

w/removable socket, 3/4 in.

square drive (stowed on interior

of rear door, left-hand side)

(19207) 7759181

V24,V25 1

8. 5120-00-650-7829 WRENCH: socket, 90° offset,

1/2 in. square opening (stowed

on interior of rear door, left-hand

side) (19207) 8380406

V24,V25 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

6150-00-134-0847

2540-00-957-5068

4210-00-775-0127

6150-00-134-0848



(Cont'd)

CABLE: electric, jumper, 600 volt, V24,V25

100 ft long w/coupling ends

(on power cable reel, right rear

of van) (19207) 11601643

LADDER: vehicle boarding, 4 ft V24,V25

long [stowed on rear doors—van

body (M934)], [stowed hydraulic

liftgate—van body (M935)]

(19207) 8759434

EXTINGUISHER ASSEMBLY: V24,V25

5 lb purple "K" dry chemical

w/ bracket (19207) 7015266

CABLE: electric, auxiliary, V24,V25

600 volt, 39-1/4 in. long (on

ceiling, front of van)

(19207) 11601641

2540-00-870-9939 COVER: cable reel, cotton duck

(over power cable—right rear

of van) (19207)

8735021

V24,V25

TA 093187

B-10 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5340-01-050-7059

7.

10.

2590-00-870-9936

2590-00-790-2293

5120-00-560-0617

2590-00-870-9937



(Cont'd)

PADLOCK SET: keyed alike, V24,V25

1-1/2 in. size, long shackle

composed of 9 padlocks and

5 keys, class 2 (on rear door,

ladders, storage compartments)

(96906) MS213I3-50

SPIKE: stabilizer anchor, V24,V25

welded (stowed in rear exterior

compartment) (19207) 7534689

HANDLE: leveling jack, V24,V25

5/8 in. dia, 19 in. lg (rear

compartment) (19207) 7534675

JACK: leveling vehicle, portable V24,V25

(rear compartment) (19207) 7534672

PLATE: leveling jack support V24,V25

(rear compartment) (19207) 7534676

I

TA 093188

Change 1 B-U

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

I

4910-00-347-9703

4910-00-433-7094

2540-00-040-2300

2540-00-040-2301

3940-00-105-9933


MEDIUM WRECKER (M936)

BAR: lifting, whiffle-tree V18

[on right deck (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8690061

BAR: towing, "V" universal type V18

w/ bumper axle clamp assembly

[on right deck (page B-37)]

(19204) 7551058

TUBE: boom jack, top [assembled V18

and stored on left deck

(page B-37)] (19207) 8330157

TUBE: boom jack, bottom V18

[assembled and stored on

left deck (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8330158

BLOCK: rigging, steel wire V18

rope, single 8 in. sheave, w/ swivel

hook, 10-ton capacity, olive

drab finish [in compartment

no. 1C (pg. B-37)] (19207) 1 1631726

TA 093 189

B-12 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

3940-01-1 14-3690

3940-00-630-9932

4010-00-473-6166

2540-00-443-4845


MEDIUM WRECKER (M936) (Cont'd)

BLOCK: rigging, wire rope. V18

double 8 in. sheave, w< swivel

shackle. 7/8 in. diameter rope.

25-ton capacity, olive drab finish

[in compartment no. IC (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 7080704

BLOCK: rigging, wire rope. V18

single 10 in. sheave w/swivel eye

and shackle, 3 4 in. diameter rope.

15-ton capacity, olive drab finish

[(in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8383238

CHAIN: tow, single leg, 5/8 in. V18

link, 16 in. long, w/2 pear-shaped

coupling links, w/ 1 grab hook

end [(in compartment no. 1 B

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 7077063

CHAIN: utility, single leg, V18

3/8 in. link. 14-1, 2 ft long

w/2 grab hooks, zinc plate finish

[in compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 10944642-2

TA 092399

Change 1 B-13

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

2.

2540-00-315-2306

4010-00-449-6573

2590-00-140-7961

5120-00-293-0665

4020-00-231-2581

4020-00-238-7734



CHOCK: field [on left deck V18

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 8330150

CHAIN: utility, single leg, V18

3/4 in. link, 12 ft long, w/grab hook,

w/ pear-shaped coupling link [in

compartment no. IB (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8744250

CABLE: slave, electric. 24 volts, V18

20 ft long,w/2 coupling ends

(NATO), w/ adapter (NATO-to-

standard) [in compartment no. I A,

pg. B-37)] (19207) I 1682379-1

BAR: wrecking, gooseneck V18

pinch point, w/claw, 3/4 in.

hexagon stock, 36 in. long, olive

drab finish, type V. class 1, style A

[in compartment no. 1C (pg. B-37)]

(57068) 130

ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 3/8 in. V18

diameter. 1-1 /8 in. circumference.

50 ft long, 325 lb capacity

(81348) 21-R-373

ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 3/4 in. V18

diameter, 2-1/4 in. circumference,

50 ft long, 1,350 1b capacity.

(81348) 21-R-403

TA 092400

B-14 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

4020-00-231-9014

5120-00-224-1390

10.

2540-00-040-2299

51 10-00-238-8296

6240-00-274-4018



ROPE: manila, 3 strand, 1 in. V18

diameter, 3 in. circumference,

300 ft long, 2,250 lb capacity

(81348) 2I-R-418

CROWBAR: pinch-point, 1-1/4 in. V18

diameter stock, 59 in. to 62 in.

long, olive drab finish, type 11.

class I, size 4 [in compartment

no. 4 (pg. B-37)] (18876) 9150189

BASE PLATE: boom jack (in V18

mounting brackets, left and right

side of rear winch) (19207) 8330155

CHISEL: machinist's, cold, V18

hand, long length, 1 in. cutting

edge, 24 in. long, olive drab

finish, type IV, class 2 [in com

partment no. 1C (pg. B-37)] (03306)

C6

LIGHT: extension w sgl plug and V18

plug socket, 25 ft wo/ lamp

(32779) 2000 G2A

I

TA 092401

Change 1 B-15

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

6545-00-922-1200

5120-00-243-9072

5340-00-838-5266

4. 4210-00-555-8837

5315-00-316-1008



FIRST-AID KIT: general V18

purpose, 12 unit [in compartment

no. I beneath crew seat (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 1 167701 1

VISE: bench and pipe, swivel V18

base, 5 in. stationary jaw,

w/1/8 in. to 4 in. pipe jaw (vehicle

front bumper) (19207) 7974484

PADLOCK SET: low security, V18

keyed alike, regular (open)

shackle, class 2 [in position

securing compartments nos. 1,

IA, IB, 1C, 2, 3, and 4

(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS2I313-124

FIRE EXTINGUISHER: hand. V18

purple "K" 2-3/4 lb.

capacity, w/ bracket, olive drab

finish [in brackets behind wrecker

crane control cab (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 10916537

PIN: tie-bar yoke, w/lock pin, V18

olive drab finish [in compartment

no. 3 (pg. B-37)] (19207) 8327939

TA 092402

B-16 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

9905-01-080-5684

7. 2540-00-040-2298

5340-00-543-3034

5340-00-753-3744

4720-00-899-6721



REFLECTOR, TRIANGLE V18

WARNING KIT: reflector type,

w /flags, w/ metal box [in com

partment no. 2 (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 10899404

TIE BAR: boom jack [on V18

left deck (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8330152

STRAP: webbing, 1-1/2 in. V18

wide x 24 in. long, w/ buckle

(securing field chocks to vehicle

deck) [on left deck

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 8690516

STRAP: webbing, 1-1/2 in. V18

wide x 36 in. long, w/ buckle

(securing boom jacks to vehicle

deck) [on left deck (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 8690473

HOSE: tank drain, hydraulic V18

oil, 1-3/16 in. outside diameter

x 5 ft long, olive drab finish

[in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 10900093

TA 090340

B-17

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

2530-00-706-1338

2590-00-040-2297

2590-00-740-9834



SLING: chain, double leg, V18

w/ring, w/2 hook ends, class 3

[in compartment no. IB (page

B-37)] (19207) 8330151

HOSE: air connecting, inter- V18

vehicular, 10-1 /2 ft long,

w/2 glad hand coupling ends


(19207) 7061338

SLING: wire rope, double leg V18

w/ring, w/2 hook ends (ring ends

attach to block, two hook ends

attach to vehicle rear bumperettes)

(19207) 8330151

PIN: boom jack, w/lock pin, V18

olive drab finish [in compart

ment no. 3 (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 7409834

TA 092403

B-18 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

4930-00-266-9182

5120-00-050-5740

7. 4930-00-253-2478

5120-00-188-1790



OILER: hand, push bottom, V18

8 oz. capacity, 4 in. long spout

[on left deck (pg. B-37)]

(96906) MS 15764-1

HAMMER: hand, sledge, V18

blacksmith's, double-face, 10 lb ,

30 in. to 33 in. handle length,

olive drab finish, type X, class 1


(77348) 2581

GREASE GUN: hand, lever V18

operated, 14 oz. cartridge or

bulk load, w/16 in. extension


(19207) 5644803

JACK: hydraulic, hand, V18

self cont, 30-ton cap, w/oper

lever, OD finish (96906) MS16282-1 I

TA 092404

Change 1 B-19

TM 9-2320-272-10


Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Description

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

FSCM and Part No. On Code



1. 5315-00-854-4431 PIN: inner boom jack, w/lock V18

pin, olive drab finish [in com

partment no. 2 (pg. B-37)]

(19207) 10876413

1

2. 2540-00-318-0326 SHACKLE: lifting, round pin. V18

7/ 8 in. diameter, olive drab

finish [in compartment no. 2

(pg. B-37)] (19207) 7357967

2

3. 5120-00-224-1372 BAR: pinch, offset and tapered V18

ends, 1 in. hexagon stock. 36 in.

long, olive drab finish, type 111


(81348) GGG-B-101

1

4. 2540-00-860-2359 BAR: cranking, outrigger, VI 8

1 in. diameter, 12 in. long,

olive drab finish [one in compart

ment no. 3 and one in compartment

no. 2, (pg. B-37)] (19207) 10900233

2

5. 5110-00-188-2524 CUTTER: bolt, rigid head type, VI 8

clipper cut type, 9/ 16 in. diameter,

mild steel rod cutting capacity, 35 in.

to 39 in. long, olive drab finish (96906)

.MSI6888-4

1

6. 51 10-00-221-1075 CHISEL: blacksmith's, cold V18

handled, 1-1 /2 in. cutting edge, 16 in.

handle olive drab finish. (96906)

MS 16882-2

1

(7)

TA 092405

B-20 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code



7. 3940-00-926-3710 BLOCK: tackle, manila rope,

single 4-3/4 in. sheave. 1 in.

diameter rope. 3 in. rope

circumference, w/ loose side hook,

w/becket, 1.700 lb capacity,

type II, class 1.

(81348) GGG-B-490

V18 1

8. 3940-00-926-3719 BLOCK: tackle, manila rope,

double 4-3 4 in. sheave, 1 in.

diameter rope. 3 in. rope

circumference, w/ loose side hook,

w/ becket, 2,450 lb capacity,

type II, class 2.

(81348) GG-B-490

V18 1

9. 5110-00-242-7147 SAW: crosscut l-man.4-1 2ft blade,

5 ft. long w/supplementary handle.

(96906) MS 165 15-2

V18 1

TA 092406

Change 1 B-21

TM 9-2320-272-10

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS

litem

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-264-3793

5120-00-277-1244

5120-00-277-1245

5120-00-277-1242

5. 5120-00-277-1461



WRENCH: auto, adjustable, V18

0 in. to 3-5/8 in. jaw opening.

15 in. long (24617)

2117080

WRENCH: open end. fixed. V18

single head, 15 degree head

angle, 1-5/8 in. opening,

15 in. long (65814) 710

WRENCH: open end. fixed, single V18

head. 15 degree head angle.

1-11/16 in. opening,

15 in. long (65814) 1010A

WRENCH: open end. fixed, single V18

head. 15 degree head angle.

1-13/ 16 in. opening.

16-1 /2 in. long

(19207) 6012498

WRENCH: pipe, heavy duty. V18

adjustable, 1 in. to 2 in. pipe

capacity, 18 in. long

(21440) 41 W664

TA 092407

B-22 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code

EQUIPMENT, WELDING AND CUTTING

(M936)

6. 5110-00-289-9657 FRAME: hacksaw, hand,

adjustable, 10 in. to 12 in. blade,

open pistol grip handle, type 1,

class 1, style B [in tool box stored

in compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]

(96906) MS 16516-1

V18 1

7. 5110-00-237-8106 BLADE: hacksaw, hand,

high-speed steel, 12 in. long,

type I, grade A, class 1 [in tool

box stored in compartment no. 1A

(pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-B-451

V18 '

8. 4240-00-269-7912 GOGGLES: industrial, chipper's,

w/eye cups, plastic, ventilated,

w/clear hardened glass lens (type 1),

50 mm diameter, non-polarized,

headband supported, over

spectacle type, w/o case, type 11,

class A [in tool box stored in

compartment no. I A (pg. B-37)]

(81348) GGG-G-5 13

V18 1

9. 5120-00-240-5328 WRENCH: open end, adjustable,

single-head type, 0.947 jaw

opening, 7-1 /2 in. to 8-1 /2 in.

long, phosphate finish, type I,

class 1 [in tool box stored in

compartment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]

(81348) GGG-W-63I

V18 1

——.— \fk _^ - i og^^

TA 092408

Change 1 B-23

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-224-3153

5120-00-224-3154

3. 5120-00-224-3138

5120-00-293-3509


(M936) (Cont'd)

WRENCH: box, double V18

offset, double head, 12 point,

short length, 3/8 in. and 7/16 in.

openings, 4 in. long, type I,

class 2, style B [in tool box

stored in compartment no. 1A

(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16370-2

WRENCH: box, double offset, V18

double head, 12 point, short

length, 1/2 in. and 9/ 16 in.

openings, 4-3/4 in. long, type 1,

class 2, style B [in tool box

stored in compartment no. IB

(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16370-4

WRENCH: box, double offset, V18

double head, 12 point, short

length, 5/8 in. and 3/4 in. openings,

6 in. long, type 1, class 2, style B

[in tool box stored in compart

ment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]

(96906) MS 16370-7

PUNCH: center, solid, 5/32 in. V18

diameter, tapered point, 3/8 in.

diameter stock, 4 in. long box


ment no. 1 A (pg. B-37)]

(19204) 41P3185

TA 090347

B-24

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-965-0603

5110-00-186-7107

5120-00-293-0448

5120-00-221-7063


(M936) (Cont'd)

FLINT TI P: friction igniter, V 1 8

sleeve type, 6-4 ONC, 6 per box,

type 1, style B [in tool box stored


(22527) 12-010

CHISEL: hand, cold, 1/2 in. V18

cutting head, 5-3/4 in. long,

type IV, class 1 [in tool box


(pg. B-37] (96906) MSI7070-3

PUNCH: drift, 3/16 in. diameter V18

point, 3/8 in. diameter stock,

10 in. long, type IX, class A

[in tool box stored in compartment

no. 1A (pg. B-37] (40684) PT1208

SCRIBER: machinist's double V18

point, screwed, 1 straight and

1 regular bent, removable, 8 in.

to 10 in. long, type II, class 1



(18876) 9176642

1 box

TA 090348

Change 1 B-25

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-277-4244

5120-00-494-191

5120-00-494-1895

7510-00-223-6708


(M936) (Cont'd)

WRENCH: plier, straight jaw, V18

8-1 /2 in. long, type I, class 1,

style B [in tool box stored in


(81348) GGG-W-649

WRENCH: plier, curved jaw V18

style. 8-1 2 in. long, type 1.

class 2. style B [in tool

box stored in compartment

no. 1A (page B-37)] (77243)

11R

CLAMP: plier, welder's upset V18

jaw style, 0 in. to 1-5/8 in.

clamping capacity. 2-5/8 in. jaw

width, 9 in. clamp length, type VI,

class C [in tool box stored in


(81348) GGG-C-406

CRAYON: marking, soapstone, V18

white, rectangular, 3/16 in. thick,

1 /2 in. wide, 5 in. long. 144 units

per box [in tool box stored in


(81348) SS-C-661

1 box

TA 092409

B-26 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5110-00-263-0341

51 10-00-242-5386

5110-00-234-6539

5110-00-234-6557


(M936) (Cont'd)

HANDLE: file, wood, 1-1/2 in. V18

diameter, 5-1/2 in. long, large

size, type II [in tool box stored


(81348) NN-H-106

FILE: hand, American pattern, V18

mill type, single-cut bastard

faces, single-cut bastard edges,

12 in. heel to point, type XIII,

class 2, style A [in tool box


(pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-F-325


flat type, double-cut bastard

faces, single-cut bastard edges,

12 in. heel to point, type VII,

style A [in tool box stored in


(95683) 41F863


round type, 1/2 in. diameter,

large section double-cut bastard

face, 12 in. heel to point, type XVI,

class I, style A [in tool box


pg. B-37)] (81348) GGG-F-325

TA 092410

Change 1 B-27

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-585-2383

7920-00-246-8501

5120-00-965-0326

5120-00-277-8301


(M936) (Cont'd)

HAMMER: hand, welder's V18

14 oz. head weight, straight peen

and punch point, single bevel,

w/coiled spring handle, 10 in.

long, type 1. class I, style D,

[in tool box stored in com

partment no. 1A (pg. B-37)]

(81348) GGG-H-35

BRUSH: wire, scratch, single V18

wire, curved handle, wire length

outside block is 1-1/8 in. to

1-1 /4 in., 4 rows wide, 18 rows

long, 10-1 /2 in. long, type III,

class 3 [in tool box stored in


(81348) HB 178/ 41

IGNITER: friction, wire frame V18

style, single flint, round file,

hooded type, type I, style A



(90598) TJ212

WRENCH: open end, fixed VI 8

double head, 15 degree head

angle, engineer's, 5/8 in. and

11/16 in., phosphate finish, type IV



(96906) MS 16380-10

TA 093190

B-28 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-187-7124

5120-00-277-2342

5120-00-078-8948


(M936) (Cont'd)

WRENCH: open end, fixed V18


angle, engineer's. 1 2 in. and

9/16 in. openings. 5-1 2 in. long,

phosphate finish, type IV [in tool

box stored in compartment no. 1A

(pg. B-37)] (96906) MS 16380-4

WRENCH: open end. fixed V18


angle, engineer's. 3/8 in. and

7/16 in. openings, 4-1/8 in. long,

phosphate finish, type IV


ment no. I A (pg. B-37)]

(96906) MS 16370-2

SQUARE: combination. 1/ 100, V18

1/64. 1 /50. and 1/32 in. gradu

ations, cast iron square and miter

head, w scriber, w level, 12 in.

long, type VI. class A, style B



(81348) TY6CLASTYB

TA 093191

Change 1 B-29

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

5120-00-239-0489

2. 5120-00-061-8546

5120-00-223-7398


(M936) (Cont'd)

RULE: multiple folding, wood

(class 1) or steel (class 2, grade A),

3 ft extended length (optional:

4 ft), 6 sections, smallest unit of

graduation: 1 / 16 in., type 111

[in tool box stored in com


(81348) GGG-R-791

HAMMER: hand, machinist's

ball-peen, 2 lb, 15 in. to 17 in.

long, w/ fiberglass handle, type 11,

class 1, style B [in tool box stored


(19207) 11677028-3

PLIERS: slip joint, straight nose,

combination w/cutter, 10 in. long,

phosphate finish type II, class 2,

style A [in tool box stored in com


(65814) 10 PLIERS

SCREWDRIVER: flat tip. flared,

plastic handle, w wrench grip.

3/8 in. wide tip. 8 in. blade,

type I. class 5. style 1. description B.

shape B [in tool box stored in com


V18

V18

V18

V18

TA 09241 1

B-30 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code


(M936) (Cont'd)

5. 5110-00-236-3272 CHISEL: hand, cold, 3/4 in.

cutting head, 6-1/2 in. long,

type IV, class 1 [in tool box stored


(96906) MS 17170-5

V18 1

6. 4240-00-203-3804 GOGGLES: industrial, welder's,

w/eye cups, plastic, ventilated,

w/ hardened glass cover lens

(type 111) 50 mm diameter

w/2 hardened spare cover lens,

headband supported, over specta

cle type, w/o case, type 11, class B



(81348) GGG-G-513

V18 1

7. 5140-00-498-8772 TOOL BOX: mechanic's, general,

w/tote tray, 21 in. long, 8-1/2 wide,

7-3/8 in. deep, olive drab finish,

type 11 [in compartment no. 1A

(pg. B-37)] (80063) CH77

V18 1

B-31

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

8415-00-268-7859

3439-00-383-3634

3433-01-070-9838

6680-00-285-6067


(M936) (Cont'd)

GLOVES: pair, leather, welder's V18 | 1 pair|

cowhide, gauntlet cuff, cotton

and wool knit lined, cream or

light gray, large, type II [in tool box


(pg. B-37)] (84150) 02687859

CLEANER SET: welding and V18

cutting tip, 12 cleaners, sizes

A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,J,K,L & M,

w/case [in tool box stored in


(00741) 832-4597

TORCH SET: cutting and V18 ! 1 set

welding, oxygen-acetylene,

medium duty, composed of the

following: [in compartment no. 1A

(pg. B-37)] (17941) KL-79

REGULATOR: pressure, com- V18

pressed gas. acetylene. 2-stage.

w/couplings. adapter and outlet,

type V [in compartment no. I A

(pg. B-37)] (63026) VTS 410-968

TA 092412

B-32 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

6680-00-641-3519

3433-00-373-1731

3433-00-373-1733

3433-00-373-1734

3433-00-373-1737

3433-00-373-1739


(M936) (Cont'd)

REGULATOR: pressure, com- V18

pressed gas. oxygen. 2-stage.

w/couplings, adapter and outlet,

tvpe VI [in compartment no. I A

(pg. B-37)] (36346) 03X05

TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, V18

drill size 42 [in compartment

no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (56770) GXU-42



no. I A (pg. B-37)] (06023) GXU50


drill size 53 [in compartment no. I A

(pg. B-37)] (42527) GXU-53

TIP: oxygen-acetylene, welding, Vl£


no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (06023) GXU-58



no. lA(pg. B-37)] (56770) TWPI862

TA 092413

Change 1 6-33

TM 9-2320-272-10


Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Description

FSCM and Part No.

Usable

On Code

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

3433-00-391-1218


(M936) (Cont'd)

TIP: oxygen-acetylene, cutting, V18


no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (06023) 250-46



no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (42527) 250-51



no. 1A (pg. B-37)] (42527) 250-56

TORCH WRENCH: oxygen- VI8

acetylene [in compartment no. 1A

(pg."B-37)] )58092) 7810

5.

I

8120-00-285-4763

8120-00-268-3360

CYLINDER: compressed gas, V18

oxygen, 250 cu ft capacity

[(behind cab, forward left side of

wrecker body)] (81349)

MIL-C-12661

CYLINDER: compressed gas, V18

acetylene, 225 cu ft capacity

[(behind cab, forward left side of

wrecker body)] (81349)

MIL-C-3701-4

TA 092414

B-34 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code


(M936) (Cont'd)

7. 3433-00-391-1220 TORCH HANDLE: welding fin

compartment no. IA (pg. B-37)]

(63026) 100

VI8 1

8. 3433-00-356-8572 HOSE: rubber, braided, oxygen,

green, 5/16 in. diameter, 25 ft

long, w/couplings, type II, style A


(55681) 5600FG

V18 1

9. HOSE: rubber, braided,

acetylene, red, 516 in. diameter,

25 ft long, w couplings, type II.

style A [in compartment no. I A

(pg. B-37)] (55681) 5600FR

V18 1

TA 092415

Change 1 B-35

TM 9-2320-272-10


Description

FSCM and Part No.

Qty.

Furn.

With

Equp.

Item

No.

National Stock

No.

Usable

On Code


(M936) (Cont'd)

1. MIXING HEAD: oxygen-

acetylene welding torch, for tip

drill sizes 72 to 31 [in compart


(42527) 240-020527

V18 1

2. 3433-00-391-1215 CUTTING ATTACHMENT:

welding torch,angle of head,

75 degrees, use w/torch handle

(3433-00-391-1217) [in compart


58-1-75 (42527)

V18 1

TA 093192

B-36 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


CYLINDER,

COMPRESSED GAS

OXYGEN

CYLINDER,

COMPRESSED GAS

ACETYLENE

COMPARTMENT

NO. IB

COMPARTMENT

NO. 1A

FIRE

EXTINGUISHER

HAND

TIE BAR, BOOM JACK*

OILER, HAND.

2-CHOCK, FIELD.

COMPARTMENT

NO. 2

BASE, BOOM JACK

COMPARTMENT

NO. 1

COMPARTMENT

NO. 4

MAP

COMPARTMENT

BOW, CANOPY

'COVER, GONDOLA

COMPARTMENT

NO. 1C

COMPARTMENT

NO. 3

BASE, BOOM JACK

TA 090359

Change 1 B-37 (B-38 blank)

TM 9-2320-272-10

APPENDIX C

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

INTRODUCTION

C-1. Scope.

This appendix lists additional items authorized for support of M939 series trucks.

C-2. General.

This list identifies items that do not have to accompany your truck and do not have to be

turned in with it.

C-3. Explanation of Listing.

a. Descriptions, national stock numbers, and part numbers, are provided to help you

identify and request additional items you require to support this equipment. If item

required differs for different models, the model is shown under the "USABLE ON"

heading in the description column. Codes used are the same as in appendix B. Basic

Issue Items.

b. U/M is unit of measure for items listed.

c. QTY. AUTH. is the quantity of the item authorized.

TA 092416

Change 1 C-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)

NATIONAL

STOCK

NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

FSCM AND PART NO.

USABLE

ON CODE

U/M QTY

AUTH

4930-00-204-2550 ADAPTER: grease gun, rigid, thin-stem,

6 in. long, type IV, class 2, (81349)

MIL- 1-4387

V18 EA 1

5110-00-293-2336 AXE: single bit

(81348) 6150925

All

Except

V18

EA 1

6135-00-120-1020 BATTERY: dry, 1.5 volt. BA 30.

(96906) MS75059

V18 EA 4

3940-00-105-9933 BLOCK: rigging, steel, wire rope, single

8 in. sheave, w/swivel hook, 5/8 in. diam

eter rope. 10-ton sale work load (19207)

11631726

V14.V12.

VI6.V19.

V21.V18

EA 1

2590-00-473-6331 BRACKET: gas/water can (81349)

MS53052-1

V18 EA 1

7240-00-222-3088 CAN: gasoline, MIL tvpe. 5 gallon.

(80244) 11677019

V18 EA 1

7240-00-242-6153 CAN: water. MIL type. 5 gallon (80244)

OMC 3-3-22

V18 EA 1

2540-00-860-2354 CASE: crosscut saw. cotton duck.

63-3/4 in. long (closed) (96906) 10876420

VI8 EA I

4010-00-473-6166 CHAIN: utility, single leg. 5/8 in. link.

16 feet long, w/grab hook, w/2 pear-shaped

coupling links, olive drab finish (19207)

7077063

V14.V12.

V16.VI9,

V21.V18

EA 1

2540-00-933-9022 CHAIN: pneumatic tire, truck,

single tire, type TS. 1 1:00 x 20

All EA 2

TA 093193

C-2 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10


NATIONAL

STOCK

NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

FSCM AND PART NO.

USABLE

ON CODE

U/M QTY

AUTH

2540-00-933-9599 CHAIN: pneumatic tire, truck,

dual tire type, 1 1:00 x 20

(96906) MS500054-10

All EA 4

2540-00-860-2355 COVER: fitted, gondola

(19207) 10876433

V18 EA 1

4210-00-775-0127 EXTINGUISHER: 5 lb, purple "K"

dry chemical, w/bracket

(19207) 7015266

All

Except

V18

EA I

4930-00-288-1511 EXTENSION: grease gun, flex hose.

12 in. long to 14 in. long

V18,V21.

V22

EA 1

6230-00-264-8261 FLASHLIGHT: electric, hand. 2-cell,

w/lamp and lens filter, w/o batteries,

type I, class A W-F-00421

V18 EA 2

5120-00-288-6574 HANDLE: mattock-pick, railroad

or clay pick (81348) NNH0093

All

Except

VI8

EA 1

KIT: first aid

(19207) 11677011

All

Except

V18

EA 1

6240-00-044-6914 LAMP: incandescent, S8 bulb, S contact,

bayonet base, 28V (96906)

MS35478-1683

V18 EA 1

5120-00-243-2375 MATTOCK: pick type, 5 lb. w/o handle

(81348) GGG-H-506

All

Except

V18

EA 1

5340-00-682-1505 PADLOCK SET: keyed alike, 1-3/4 in.,

w/clevis and chain, composed of

5 padlocks and 7 keys (96906)

MS21313-54

All

Except

V18

EA 1

TA 093194

Change 1 C-3

TM 9-2320-272-10


NATIONAL

STOCK

NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

FSCM AND PART NO.

USABLE

ON CODE

U/M QTY

AUTH

9905-00-148-9546 REFLECTOR, TRIANGLE WARNING

KIT: reflector type, w/flags, w/metal box

(19207) 10899404

All

Except

V18

EA 1

5120-00-293-3336 SHOVEL: hand, rd. pt..

D handle, short size

(81348) GGG-S-326

All EA 1

Except

V18

7240-00-177-6154 SPOUT: can, gasoline, flex, w/filter

screen. 2-1/4 in. outside diameter,

16 in. long (19207) 11677020

V18 EA 1

TA 093195

C-4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

APPENDIX D

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST

INTRODUCTION

D-1. Scope.

This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain

M939 series trucks.

D-2. Explanation of Columns.

a. Item Number. This number is assigned to each entry in the listing.

b. Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the

listed item. Codes used in this column are:

C — Operator/ Crew

O — Organizational Maintenance Personnel

c. National Stock Number. This is the national stock number assigned an item. Use

this number to request or requisition that item.

d. Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a description to

identify the item. The last line for each item listing indicates the part number and the

Federal supply code for manufacturer (FSCM) in parenthesis. For FSCM codes and

abbreviations used, refer to appendix B on preceding pages, as required.

e. Unit of Measure (VI M). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual

maintenance function. This measure is expressed by an abbreviation (such as EA (each),

OZ (ounce), GAL (gallon)). If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue,

requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy the requirements.

TA 090364

D-1

TM 9-2320-272-10

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST

ITEM LEVEL

NATIONAL

STOCK

NO.

DESCRIPTION U/M

NO.

6830-00-264-6751 ACETYLENE, TECHNICAL: gas filled

acetylene (to be refilled locally). 1-C 2175

(80244)

1 O 8120-00-285-4763 225 CU. FT. CYLINDER CU.

FT.

ANTIFREEZE: PERMANENT ETYHLENE

GLYCOL (-65° F) INHIBITED (O-A-548,

type I)

2 C 6850-00-243-1992 1 GAL CONTAINER GAL

3 c 6850-00-224-8730 5 GAL CONTAINER GAL

4 c 6850-00-243-1990 55 GAL DRUM GAL

ANTIFREEZE: PERMANENT TYPE;

ARCTIC GRADE (-90° F) (0-1-490)

(MIL-C- 11755)

5 c 6850-00-174-1806 55 GAL DRUM GAL

GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE AND ARTIL

LERY GAA (M1L-G- 10924)

6 c 9150-00-065-0029 2Va OZ TUBE OZ

7 c 9150-00-935-1017 14 OZ CARTRIDGE OZ

8 c 9150-00-190-0904 1 LB CAN LB

9 c 9150-00-190-0905 5 LB CAN LB

10 c 9150-00-190-0907 35 LB CAN LB

11 c 9150-00-190-7369 120 LB DRUM LB

INHIBITOR: CORROSION, LIQUID

COOLING SYSTEM; POWDER FORM

12 c 6850-00-753-4967 6 OZ CAN OZ

OIL. FUEL, DIESEL DF-2, REGULAR

(VV-F-800)

13 c 9150-00-286-5295 5 GAL CAN GAL

14 c 9150-00-286-5296 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL


16 c 9150-00-286-5294 BULK

TA 092417

D-2 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)

ITEM

NO.

LEVEL

NATIONAL

STOCK

NO.

DESCRIPTION U/M

OIL, FUEL, DIESEL DF-1, WINTER

(VV-F-800)

17 C 9150-00-286-5287 5 GAL DRUM GAL

18 C 9150-00-286-5288 55 GAL DRUM, 16 GAGE GAL

19 C 9150-00-286-5289 55 GAL DRUM, 18 GAGE GAL

20 c 9150-00-286-5286 BULK GAL

OIL, FUEL, DIESEL DF-A (ARCTIC)

21 c 9150-00-286-5282 5 GAL DRUM GAL



24 c 9150-00-286-5283 BULK GAL

OIL, LUBRICATING, ENGINE, ARCTIC

(Ice, sub-zero) OEA (MIL-L^6167)

25 c 9150-00-402-4478 1 QT CAN QT

26 c 9150-00-402-2372 5 GAL CAN GAL


OIL, LUBRICATING, EXPOSED GEAR,

CW (VV-L-75I)

28 c 9150-00-234-5197 5 LB CAN LB

29 c 9150-00-261-7891 35 LB PAIL LB

LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR, MULTI

PURPOSE, GO 80/90 (MIL-L-2105)

30 c 9150-01-035-5392 1 QT CAN QT

31 c 9150-01-035-5393 5 GAL DRUM GAL


TA 0924 18

Change 1 D-3

TM 9-2320-272-10

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)

ITEM

NO.

LEVEL

NATIONAL

STOCK

NO.

DESCRIPTION U/M

LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR MULTI

PURPOSE. GO 75 (MIL-L-10324)

33 C 9150-01-035-5390 1 QT CAN QT

34 C 9150-01-035-5391 5 GAL DRUM GAL

OIL, LUBRICATING, OE/HDO 10

(M1L-L-2I04)

35 c 9150-00-189-6727 1 QT CAN QT

36 c 9150-00-186-6668 5 GAL DRUM GAL



39 c 9150-00-753-4763 BULK GAL

OIL, LUBRICATING, OE/HDO 30

(M1L-L-2I04)

40 c 9150-00-186-6681 1 QT CAN QT

41 c 9150-00-188-9558 5 GAL DRUM GAL



44 c 9150-00-753-4764 BULK GAL

OXYGEN, TECHNICAL

45 0 6310-00-272-0123 220-240 CU. FT. CYLINDER CU.

FT.

SOLVENT. DRYCLEANING SD (P-D-680)

46 c 6850-00-664-5685 1 QT CAN QT

47 c 6850-00-281-1985 1 GAL CAN GAL

METHYL ALCOHOL. METHANOL

48 o 6810-00-597-3608 1 GAL CAN GAL

49 0 6810-00-275-6010 5 GAL CAN GAL

TA 0924 19

D-4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX

Para Page

A

A-frame kit:

General 2-30a 2-156

Operation 2-30c 2-156

Preparation for use 2-30b 2-156

Preventive maintenance service 2-8 2-64

Troubleshooting 3-8 3-25

After operation:

In dusty or sandy areas 2-37 2-168

In extreme cold 2-34 2-160

In extreme heat 2-36 2-166

In mud 2-39 2-170

In rainy or humid areas 2-38 2-169

In salt water 2-40 2-171

In snow 2-35 2-164

Service 2-8 2-37

Air brake hand control kit:

General 2-32a 2-158

Operation 2-32b 2-158

Air cleaner service 3-IOt 3-31

Air reservoirs:

Final inspection 3-1 Ic 3-33

General 3-1 la 3-33

Preventive maintenance 2-8 2-44

Service 3-1 lb 3-33

Approach angle (see table 1-3) 1-12 1-20

Arctic kit (-65° F/-55°C):

General 2-29a 2-149

Operating engine compartment cover 2-29b 2-149

Operation, fuel-burning engine coolant heater 2-29d 2-152

Operation, fuel-burning personnel heater 2-29c 2-150



Assembly and preparation for use 2-2 2-1

Authorized forms 1-2 1-2

B

Basic issue items B-6 B-3

Before operation check:


In extreme cold 2-34b 2-160

In extreme heat 2-36b 2-166

In mud 2-39a 2-170

In salt water areas , 2-40b 2-171

In snow 2-35a 2-164

Before operation service under normal conditions 2-8 2-37

Bow, curtains, and body paulin installation 2-28a 2-142 g

Brake system:


Releasing spring brake (emergency) 3-15 3-39


TA 092420

Change 1 INDEX 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

C

Cab controls 2-3 2-2

Cab top:

Installation 2-18 2-82

Removal 2-18 2-82

Capacities (see table 1-5) 1-12 1-22

Cargo bodv paulin:

■ Installation 2-28a 2-142

Raising 2-28b 2-145

Removal 2-28c 2-145

Cargo trucks (M923, M924. M925, M926, M927. M928):

Body equipment controls and indicators 2-4c 2-19

■ Bow and tarp kit installation 2-28 2-142

Chassis controls and indicators 2-3 2-2

Chassis dimensions (see table 1-3) 1-12 1-20

Cold weather kit (-25° F/-32°C):

General 2-29a 2-149

Operation 2-29 2-149

Preventive maintenance services 2-8 2-65


Controls and instruments:

Dump truck (M929. M930) 2-3. 2-2.

2-4b 2-17

Front winch controls 2-19 2-84

Heater (-25° F/-32°C) 2-3 2-2

Heater (-65° F/ -55° C) 2-5d 2-30

Heater, engine coolant 2-29d 2-152

Instrument panel instruments and controls 2-3 2-2

Coolant surge tank 2-3 2-10

Crane. M936:

Controls 2-4a 2-13

General 2-2 la 2-94

Operation 2-2ld 2-100

Rig the load 2-2 1 c 2-97

Securing crane alter operation 2-2 1 f 2-108

D

Deep water lording kit:

General 2-26a 2-138


Preparation for fording 2-26b 2-138



Destruction to prevent enemy use A-2 A-1

Differences between models (see table I- 1 1) 1-12 1-26

Dimensions (see table I -I) 1-12 1-18

Driving:



In mud 2-39 2-170

TA 092421

INDEX 2 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

In salt water areas 2-40 2-171

In sandy or dusty areas 2-37 2- 1 68

In snow 2-35 2-164

Placing and sustaining vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72

Dump trucks (M929. M930):

Chassis controls and instruments 2-3 2-2

Body equipment controls and indicators 2-4h 2-17


E

Electric hrake kit:


Operation 2-3 1 2-157

Emergency procedure tor stopping engine 2-14 2-76

Emergency service (radiator tan clutch) 3-16 3-40

End curtain, cargo bodv:

Installation - 2-28a 2-142 ■

Removal 2-28c 1-145

Engine and radiator data (see table 1-8) 1-12 1-24

Engine oil level (PMCS) 2-8 2-48

Engine service:

Air cleaner 3- 1 01 3-31

Air reservoirs 3-11 3-33

Coolant surge tank 3- 10c 3-29

Fuel filter 3-l0e 3-29

General 3-10a 3-28

Oil level 3-1 0b 3-28

F

Fording operation 2-26c 2-139

Forms and records:

Authorized forms 1-2 1-2

Report of errors, omissions, and recommendations I -2b 1-2

Front winch:

Controls 2-3 2-8

Operation 2-19 2-84

Preparation for use 2- 19a 2-84

Fuel system:

Filter service 3-10e 3-29

Fuels, permissible (see table 1-5) 1-12 1-22

G

Gaging tires 3-l4h 3-38

General service data (see table 1-6) 1-12 1-23 ■

H

Heater, engine coolant:

Operating 2-29d 2-152

Shutting down 2-29<l 2-152

Starting 2-29tl 2-15?

Heater, personnel (-65° F -55°C):

Operating 2-29c 2-150

Shutting down 2-29e 2-150

Starting 2-2* 2-150

TA 092422

Change 1 INDEX 3

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Hood, vehicle cab:

General , 2- 17a 2-81

Raising and securing hood ; 2- 1 7b 2-81

Induction system, air:

Air cleaner service 3-1 Of 3-31

Instrument panel:

Controls and indicators 2-3 2-2

K

Kit. A-frame:


General 2-30a 2-156




Kit. air brake hand control:

General 2-32a 2-158


Kit. arctic (-65° F -55°C)

Controls 2-5d 2-29

General 2-29 2-149

Operation 2-29b-d 2-149



Kit. deep water fording:

General 2-26a 2-138




Kit, electric brake:


Operating 2-3lb.c 2-157

Kit. troopseat and paulin (M929. M930):


L

Lowering windshield 2-18 2-82

Lubrication:

| General information under usual conditions 3-6 3-1.1

Lubrication information, detailed (see LO 9-2320-272-12):

Engine oil 3-10b 3-28

Lubrication interval 3-5a 3-1

Lubrication points (see LO 9-2320-272-12) 3-5b 3-1

Lubrication reports and records 3-5c 3-1

| Lubrication under unusual conditions 3-6 3-1.1

M

Maximum road speed (see table 1-9) 1-12 1-24

Metric svstem Inside back cover

O

Oil level, engine 2-8 2-48

Oil seal and gasket leakage 2-9 2-38

Operating precautions 2-10 2-67

TA 092423

INDEX 4 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Operating vehicle:

Driving in reverse 2- 13m 2-75

Driving vehicle 2-13 2-72

Parking vehicle 2-14 2-76

Placing vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72

Stopping vehicle 2-14 2-76

Operation:

A-frame 2-30c 2-156

Air brake hand control 2-32b 2-158

Arctic kit (-65° F/ -55° C) 2-29 2-149

Auxiliary equipment 2-25 2-137

Cold weather kit (-25°F/-32°C) 2-29 2-149


Dump truck (M929, M930) 2-22 2-110

Electric brake 2-31 2-157

Front winch 2-19 2-84

In dusty or sandy areas 2-37 2-168



In mud • 2-39 2-170

In rainy or humid areas 2-38 2-169

In salt water 2-40 2-171

In snow 2-35 2-164

Liftgate 2-24d 2-122

Medium wrecker (M936) 2-21 2-94

Rear winch 2-21c 2-94

Slave receptacle 2-15 2-78

Tractor (M931, M932) 2-23 2-115

Truck, cargo (M923, M924. M925. M926. M927. M928) 2-20 • 2-90

Van(M934. M935) 2-24 2-122

Wrecker crane (M936) 2-2 Id 2-100

Operation in dusty or sandy areas:

At halt or parking 2-37c 2-168

General 2-37a 2-168

Placing vehicle in motion 2-37b 2-168

Operation in extreme cold:

At halt or parking 2-34a.b 2-160


Driving vehicle 2-34d 2-161

General 2-34a 2-160

Starting engine 2-34c 2-160

Operation in extreme heat:

At halt or parking 2-36b 2-166

General 2-36a 2-166

Operation in mud:



General 2-39a 2-170

Operation in salt water areas:

After operation 2-40d 2-172

General 2-40a 2-171

TA 090372

INDEX 5

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Operation in salt water 2-40c 2-171

Preparation tor lording 2-40b 2-171

Operation in snow:

Alter operation 2-35c 2-165


General 2-35a 2-164

Operation of crane (M936):

Controls 2-4a 2-13

General 2-2 la 2-94

Operation 2-2 Id 2-100

Securing crane alter operation 2-2 1 f 2-108

Towing 2-2 le 2-106

Operation of dump truck (M929. M930):

Controls 2-4b 2-17

Description 1-8 1-10

General 2-22 2-110

Regular operation 2-22b 2-111

Rocker operation 2-22c 2-112

Spreader operation 2-22d 2-113

Operation ol front winch:

Controls 2-3 2-6

General 2-19 2-84

Operation 2-19d 2-86

Operation of medium wrecker (M936):

Description I - 1 0 1-14

General 2-2 la 2-94

Operation 2-20b-d 2-94

Operation of rear winch (M936):

Controls 2-4a 2-13

General 2-2lc 2-94


Operation of tractor (M931. M932):

Coupling trailer 2-23c 2-116


General 2-23a 2-115

Uncoupling trailer 2-23d 2-119

Wedge adjustment 2-23b 2-115

Operation of truck, cargo (M923. M924. M925. M926. M927. M928):

Cargo loading (dropsides) I -5b. 1-4.

2-20f 2-92

Cargo loading (fixed sides) 1 -6b. 1-7.

2-20 2-90

■ Curtain installation 2-28a 2-142

Curtain removal 2-28c 2-145

I General 2-28 2-142

Paulin installation 2-28a 2-142

Paulin removal 2-28c 2-145

Raising paulin 2-28b 2-145

Troopseat operation 2-20c 2-90

TA 092424

INDEX 6 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Operation of van (M934, M935):

Air conditioner operation 2-24h 2-130

Blackout operation -. 2-2li 2-131

Description 1-1 1 1-16

Expanding bodv 2-24c 2-1-24

General 2-24a 2-122

Heater operation 2-24g 2-129

Liftgate operation 2-24d. 2-122.

2-24j 2-132

Operating site selection 2-24b 2-122

Retracting body 2-41 k 2-133

Operator preventive maintenance service (tabic 2-2) 2-8 2-39

P

Parking vehicle:

In dusty or sandy areas 2-37c 2-168

In extreme cold 2-34e 2-161

In extreme heat 2-36d 2-168

Usual conditions 2-14 2-76

Paulin. bows and troopseats:

Bow, curtains and body paulin installation 2-2Sa 2-142 I

Cab paulin installation 2-l8n 2-83

Removing cab top and lowering windshield 2-18 2-82

Side rack and troopseat installation (cargo) 2-20 2-90

Side rack and troopseat removal 2-20a 2-90

Side rack and troopseat installation (dump) 2-27 2-141

Paulin. cargo bodv:

Installation 2-28a 2-142 I

Raising 2-28b 2-145

Removal 2-28c 2-145

Placing vehicle in motion 2-13 2-72

Placing vehicle in motion in sandy areas 2-37b 2-168

Preparation for starting engine 2-11 2-67

Preparation for use 2-2 2-1

Preparations for fording 2-26b 2-138

Preventive maintenance checks and services (see table 2-2) 2-8 2-39

R

Radiator fan clutch emergency service 3-16 3-40

Rear winch:

Controls 2-4a 2-13

Operation 2-2 lc 2-94

References A- 1 A- 1

Releasing spring brake (emergency) 3-15 3-39

Reporting materiel failures 1 -2b 1-2

Reservoirs, air:

Final inspection 3-1 lc 3-33

General 3-1 la 3-33

Service 3-1 lb 3-33

S

Scope:

Manual 1-1 1-'

TA 092425

Change 1 INDEX 7

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Service upon receipt of materiel 2-2 2-1

Side rack and troopseat:

Installation 2-20e 2-92

Removal 2-20d 2-91

Slave receptacle:

General 2-15 2-78

Operation 2-15 2-78

Troubleshooting 3-8

Using to start engine 2-15 2-78

Special purpose kits 2-25 2-137

Special tools and equipment 3-1 3-1

Starting engine:


Preparation for starting 2-8 2-39

Starting (above +32° F/+0°C) 2-11 2-67

Starting (below +32° F/+0°C) 2-12 2-70

Using slave receptacle to start engine 2-15 2-78

Steering system:

Reservoir service 3-10 3-29

Stopping engine:

Emergency procedure 2-14g 2-77

Normal procedure 2-14 2-76

Stopping vehicle 2-14 2-76

Tables:

1-1 — Vehicle Dimensions 1-12 1-18

1-2 — Weights 1-12 1-19

1-3 — Chassis Dimensions 1-12 1-20

1-4 — Shipping Dimensions 1-12 1-21

1-5 — Capacities for Normal Operating Conditions 1-12 1-22

| i_6 _ General Service Data 1-12 1-23

1_7 _ Tire Inflation Data 1-12 1-23

1-8 — Engine and Radiator Data 1-12 1-24

1-9 — Automatic Transmission Data 1-12 1-24

1-10 — Winch and Crane Data 1-12 1-25

1- 11 — Differences Between Models 1-12 1-26

2- 1 — General Cleaning Instructions 2-7 2-36

2-2 — Operator and Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks Service . 2-8 2-39

2-3 — Typical Material Weights 2-22 2-110

2-4 — M939 Series Special Purpose Kits 2-25 2-137

3- 1 — Troubleshooting 3-8 3-3

Basic issue items list B-3

Additional authorization list C-1

Expendable supplies and materials list D-2

Tank coolant surge 2-3, 2-10,

3- 10c 3-29

Tarpaulin and troopseat kit (dump truck):


Tire inflation:

Gaging tire 3- 14b 3-38

General 3- 14a 3-38

TA 092426

* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1983-654-002/4014

INDEX 8 Change 1

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Inflating tire 3- 14c 3-38

Pressures (see table 1-7) 1-12 1-23

Towing vehicle:

With wrecker 2-2 1 e 2-106

Tractor (M931, M932):

Controls and instruments 2-4d 2-20


Troubleshooting (table 3-1):


Brakes 3-8 3-9

Clutch, transmission and transfer 3-8 3-7

Controls and instruments 3-8 3-12


Dump body hoist assembly 3-8 3-12

Engine 3-8 3-3

Fifth wheel assembly 3-8 3-12

Fuel-burning personnel and engine coolant heaters 3-8 3-21

Hot water personnel heater 3-8 3-6

Hydraulic crane 3-8 3-14

Van, auxiliary equipment 3-8 3-17

Wheels, tires and suspension .- 3-8 3-10

V

Van (M934, M935):

Air conditioner operation 2-24h 2-130

Blackout operations 2-24i 2-131

Controls and instruments 2-4e 2-21

Expanding body 2-24e 2-124

Heater operation 2-24g 2-129

Leveling body 2-24c 2-122

Liftgate operation (M935) 2-24d. 2-122,

2-24j 2-132

Operating site selection 2-24b 2-122

Retracting body 2-24k 2-133

Setting up instructions 2-24 2-122

W

Wedges, adjustment (fifth wheel) 2-23b 2-1 15

Weight, vehicle and payload (see table 1-2) 1-12 1-19

Wheels and tires:

General 3- 13a 3-34

Removal 3- 1 3c 3-35

Replacement 3- 13d 3-37

Spare tire removal 3- 1 3b 3-34

Winch:

Front 2-19 2-84

Rear 2-2 Ic 2-94

Windshield lowering 2-18 2-82

Wrecker, medium (M936):

Controls and instruments 2-4a 2-13


General 2-21a 2-94

Operation of crane 2-2 Id 2-100

TA 090376

INDEX 9

TM 9-2320-272-10

INDEX (Cont'd)

Para Page

Operation ol front winch 2-19 2-84

Operation of rear winch 2-21c 2-94

Towing 2-2le 2-106

TA 090377

*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1962—554-002/78

INDEX 10

TM 9-2320-272-10

TO 36A12-1C-441

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force:

Official:

E. C.MEYER


Chief ofStaff

ROBERT M. JOYCE

Brigadier General, United States Army


Official:

CHARLES A. GABRIEL, General, USAF

Chief of Staff

JAMES E. WYATT, JR., Colonel, USAF

Director ofAdministration

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38, Operator Maintenance

Requirements for Tri ck, 5 -Ton 6x6, M939 Series (Diesel) .

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

WITH THIS PUBLICATION?

THEN. . JOT DOWN THE

DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS

FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT

OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT

IN THE MAIL'

FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADORESS)

DATE SENT

PUBLICATION NUMBER

TM 9-2320-272-10

PUBLICATION OATE PUBLICATION TITLE

Truck, 5-Ton, 6x6, M939 Series

(Diesel)

BE EXACT. PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS

PAGE

NO.

PARA

GRAPH

FIGURE

NO.

TABLE

NO.

IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG

ANO WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:

PRINTED NAME. GRADE OR TITLE. ANO TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE:

PREVIOUS EDITIONS

ARE OBSOLETE.P.S.-IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR

RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS

AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS.

REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028-2

Commander

US Army Tank -Automotive Command

ATTN: DRSTA-MB

Warren, Michigan 48090

THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS

LINEAR MEASURE

I Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.0 1 Meters = 0.3937 Inches

I Meter = 100 Centimeters = 1.000 Millimeters = 39.37 Inches

1 Kilometer = 1.000 Meters = 0.621 Miles

WEIGHTS

I Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1 .000 Milligrams = 0.035 Ounces

I Kilogram = 1.000 Cirams = 2.2 Lb

I Metric Ton = 1.000 Kilograms = 1 Megagram I 1 Short

Tons

LIQUID MEASURE

I Milliliter = 0.001 Liters = 0.0338 Fluid Ounces

I Liter = l.(XK) Milliliters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces

SQUARE MEASURE

I Sq Centimeter - 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inches

I Sq Meter = 10.000 Sq Centimeters = 10.76 Sq Feet

I Sq Kilometer = 1.000.000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Miles

CUBIC MEASURE

1 Cu Centimeter = 1.000 Cu Millimeters = 0.06 Cu Inches

I Cu Meter = 1 .000.(XX) Cu Centimeters = 35.31 Cu Feet

TEMPERATURE

5 9 ( F -32) = C

212 Fahrenheit is equivalent to I(X) Celsius

40 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2 Cesius

32 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0 Celsius

4 5 C »32 F

APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS

TO CHANGE TO

Inches Centimeters

Feet Meters

Yards Meter,

Miles Kilometers

Square Inches Square Centimeters

Square Feet Square Meters

Square Yards Square Meters

Square Miles Square Kilometers

Acres Square Hectometers

Cubic Feet Cubic Meters

Cubic Yards Cubic Meters

Fluid Ounces Milliliters

Pints I Hers

Quarts I Hers

Gallons I iters

Ounces Grams

Pounds Kilograms

Short Ions Metric I ons

Pound-Feet Newton-Meters

Pounds Per Square Inch Kilopascals

Miles Per Gallon Kilometers Per I iter

Miles Per Hour Kilometers Per Hour

TO CHANGE TO

Centimeters Inches

Meters Feet

Meters Yards

Kilometers Miles

Square Centimeters Square Inches

Square Meters Square Feet

Square Meters Square \ ards

Square Kilometers Square Miles

Square Hectometers Acres

Cubic Meters Cubic Feet

Cubic Meters Cubic Yards

Milliliters Fluid Ounces

Liters Pints

Liters Quarts

Liters Gallons

Grams Ounces

Kilograms Pounds

Metric Tons Short Tons

Newton-Meters Pound-Feet

Kilopascals Pounds Per Square Inch

Kilometers Per Liter Miles Per Gallon

Kilometers Per Hour Miles Per Hour

MULTIPLY BY

2 540

0 305

0 914

1 609

6 451

0 093

0 836

2 590

0.405

0 028

0 765

29 573

0 471

0 946

1 785

2K 149

II 454

0 907

1 <56

6.895

0 42">

1 609

MULTIPLY BY

0.394

3.280

1.094

0.621

0.155

10 764

I 196

0.386

2.471

35.315

1.308

0.034

2.113

1.057

0.264

0.035

2.205

1.102

0.738

0.145

2.354

0.621

O -3

I—z

SO

3*1

Documents

Operator's manual, truck 5-ton, 6X6, M939 series